Professional Documents
Culture Documents
International Codes V8i (DEFINITIONS) PDF
International Codes V8i (DEFINITIONS) PDF
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 4)
Copyright Notice
© 2013, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to
applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of
Bentley Systems, Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade
secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Acknowledgments
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and
International treaties.
Examples Manual 4
Graphical Environment 4
Design Modes 6
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code 101
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-01 129
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94 165
3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01 173
7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992] 219
9B. French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code 394
10B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code 414
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code 512
iv — STAAD.Pro
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 558
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999) 726
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993 760
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and
Reports 822
vi — STAAD.Pro
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various
international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by
Bentley Sytems, Incorporated. In other words, they do not come with the standard license
package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be
actually pertinent to the license package available to you.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and
the STAAD Application Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some basic
information about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A
brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding
clauses in the codes is also provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to
facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the commands and design parameters. You are
urged to refer to the Examples Manual for solved problems that use the commands and
features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that
govern the design, we recommend that you consult the documentation of the code of that
country for additional details on the design criteria.
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications
primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures,
industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations,
culverts and other embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following
facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for
creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using
lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and
quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These
utilities allow the user to create the geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as
desired, assign materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply
loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element
analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady
state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber
members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear
walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining
displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and
solid stress contours, etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely
accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and
prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc.
2 — STAAD.Pro
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro’s internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap
into STAAD’s database and link input and output data to third-party software written
using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD
allows users to link in-house or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. If you want to obtain
a printed copy of the books, visit the docs.bentley.com site to check availability and order.
Bentley also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no cost for those who want to print
them on their own. See the back cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine.
The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly
encountered by structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of
STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design,
result verification, and report generation.
4 — STAAD.Pro
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
Batch Design
Batch Design
Using this method, code checks and/or member selection is performed directly by the
analysis and design engine when an analysis is performed.
The contents of this manual, along with those in the Technical Reference manual, are all
used for batch design.
Design Modes
Code checks and member selection is performed in a post-processing module for either Steel
Design or Concrete Design. These modes are available in the Graphical User Interface.
Refer to the Steel Design mode and Concrete Design mode help sections for additional
information.
Table 14.1-Available steel design codes
in the Steel Design mode
Country/Region Code
Europe EC3 DD
India IS 800
6 — STAAD.Pro
Batch Design versus Design Modes
Note: Design per the Chinese steel code GB50017-2003 must be performed per the
localized STAAD SSDD interface. Please download and install this application from
Bentley SELECT.
Australia AS 3600
China GB50010
Eurocode 2 - 1991
Europe
Eurocode 2 - 2004
France BAEL
India IS456
Japan AIJ
Norway NS3473
Russia SP52-101-03
Singapore CP65
Spain EHE
Turkey TS 500
ACI 318-99
United States ACI 318-05 /
318M-05
Design of members per AS 3600 - 2001 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
20
25
32
40
50
65
250
400
450
500
12 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
250
400
450
500
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis,
use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA ANALYSIS
will accommodate the requirements of the second- order analysis described by AS 3600,
except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely
ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a
normal structural configuration.
14 — STAAD.Pro
cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just
algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during
the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5
for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The
parameters FYMAIN, FC, MAXMAIN, MINMAIN, and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab
design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
16 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 1A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
Design of members per AS 3600 - 1998 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
1B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at
which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for
each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100.
A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
Note: Local member deflections parallel to the local member y-axis can be checked against
a user-defined maximum “span / deflection” ratio. This can be performed using the
DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 design parameters, however this is only available for MEMBER
Design. Details are provided in the sections that follow.
Refer to Section 5.25 of the Technical Reference manual for further information on the
Member Offset feature.
Note: NSC and NSF design parameters are used to manually specify a reduction in net
section area for compression or tension capacity calculations. These can be used to
account for bolt hole area reductions. Further details are provided in the sections
that follow.
20 — STAAD.Pro
1B.2 Analysis Methodology
Either the elastic or dynamic analysis methods may be used to obtain the forces and moments
for design as per AS 4100 section 4.4. Analysis is done for the specified primary and repeat
loading conditions. Therefore, it is your responsibility to enter all necessary loads and load
combination factors for design in accordance with the AS/NZS 1170 Series or other relevant
design codes. You are allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and
using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the
analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic
analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
Note: Plastic analysis and design in accordance with AS 4100 section 4.5 is not
implemented in STAAD.Pro.
i. First Order Linear, Elastic Analysis - used to perform a regular elastic stiffness analysis
as per AS 4100 4.4.2.1. Refer to Section 5.37.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for
additional details on this feature.
ii. Second Order PDelta Linear, Elastic Analysis - Depending on the type of structure, a
PDelta analysis may be required in order to capture second-order effects as per AS 4100
4.4.1.2. Second-order effects can be captured in STAAD.Pro by performing a PDelta
second-order elastic analysis as per AS 4100 Appendix E. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the
Technical Reference Manual for additional details on this feature.
Hint: In order to correctly capture second-order effects for combination load cases
using a PDelta Analysis, the Repeat Load feature must be used. Second-order
effects will not be correctly evaluated if the Load Combination feature is
used. Load Combinations are combinations of results where Repeat Loads
instruct the program to perform the analysis on the combined load actions.
Refer to Section 5.32.11 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
details on using Repeat Loads.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be
obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Table 1B.2-Available Australian Sections for STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design
General Profile Type Australian Sections Description
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100: Double Profiles
(D), Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom Cover Plates (BC), and
Top & Bottom Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D, BA, & FR) and Double
Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section Profile Tables in the Graphical Environment for
these options.
Hint: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section library
through the Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pro’s default tables are American. To
change the default tables to Australian, select File > Configuration from the
STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set the Default Profile Table to
Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section Profile Table.
22 — STAAD.Pro
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
1B.4.1 UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
1B.4.2 UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115
23 56 TA ST WB1200X455
25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114
23 56 TA ST WC400X303
1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75
6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380
11 TA D PFC230
17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel PFC230 with no
spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units
between the channels.
1B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm.
This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle)
may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an “RA” (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-Z Axis) in
order to be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and minor
principal axes align with the local member z and y axes respectively, similar to
other section profiles.
33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD A75X50X6
43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
24 — STAAD.Pro
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE
sections specified in this latter manner.
1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5
6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by
the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length
units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this
latter manner.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 10
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN
* UB SHAPES
1 TA ST UB200X25.4
* UC SHAPES
2 TA ST UC250X89.5
* CHANNELS
3 TA ST PFC125
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
4 TA D PFC200
* ANGLES
5 TA ST A30X30X6
* REVERSE ANGLES
6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
9 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINISH
Refer Section 5.26.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Built-in
Material Constants feature.
Refer Section 2.26.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Define
Material feature.
l change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created
l define a new steel material for each file created
26 — STAAD.Pro
C:/Windows/StaadPro20070.ini, going to the “[Material-Metric]” section, and
changing E1=205.0e6 to E1=200.0e6. Restart STAAD.Pro for this to take effect.
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists applied loads,
and accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects. The nominal member
capacity on the other hand refers to the capacity of a member to resist applied loads, and
includes checks for global member buckling effects including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional
buckling, etc.
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area
φNt section axial tension capacities are calculated (Cl.7.2). Through the use of the NSF
parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS
4100. Eccentric end connections can be taken into account using the KT correction factor,
perCl.7.3. The f yield stress is based on the minimum plate yield stress. Parameters FYLD, FU,
y
and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
on effective plate widths per Cl.6.2.4, and the f yield stress is based on the minimum plate
y
yield stress.
Nominal member capacity, φNc, is a function of nominal section capacity and member
slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about both principal x and y
axes. Here, you are required to supply the value of αb (Cl.6.3.3) through the ALB parameter
(see Table 1B.1). The effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be
provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
1B.7.3 Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending moment of
members is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member
capacity (ref. Cl.5.1).
The nominal section moment capacity, φM , is calculated about both principal x and y axes
s
and is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the
product of the yield stress of the material and the effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The
effective section modulus is a function of section type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or
slender) and minimum plate yield stress f . The nominal member capacity depends on overall
y
flexural-torsional buckling of the member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (fy,web and fy.flange respectively)
are different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both the web and
flange to determine the slenderness of these elements.
Member moment capacity, φMb , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref. Cl.5.6).
Critical flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design segment and sub-
segments are used as the basis for calculating capacities.
Note: This check is only carried out where φVv section web shear capacities are
calculated. Refer Table 1B.6-1 for details.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial
bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here, the adequacy of a
member is also examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity
(ref.Cl.8.4.5). These account for both in-plane and out-of-plane failures. If the summation of
the left hand side of the equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceeds 1.0 or the
allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is
considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
28 — STAAD.Pro
1B.7.5 Shear
Section web shear capacity, φVv , is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear yield and shear
buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the
cross section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both
local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see
Table 1B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different profile types.
Table 1B.3-Section Type Shear Checks
General Profile Type Australian Shear Checks
Section
T-SECTION BT, CT
CHANNEL PFC
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not considered.
Bearing capacities are not considered.
1B.7.6 Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS 4100.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these
parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Design Code to
follow. See section
5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
If ALB is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based on
TABLE 6.3.3(1), 6.3.3
(2); otherwise the
input value is used.
If ALM is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based
cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is
used.
30 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Design Description
Name Scope
0 = at
Shear
center
1 = At
top
flange
32 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Design Description
Name Scope
0.0 = normal
grade
1.0 = high
strength grade
steel
1B.8.1 Notes
a. DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection calculations
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
a. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which
local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
34 — STAAD.Pro
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF.
b. LHT Parameter
If the shear force is constant within the segment, longitudinal position of the load is
assumed to be at the segment end.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting downward determined
from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top
flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not
FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.4.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting upward determined
from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top
flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not
FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.0 as the load acting at the top flange is
contributing to stabilize against local torsional buckling.
c. SGR Parameter
AS 4100 defines the values of steel grades that are used as either normal steel or high
grade steel. The following table explains the material values used when either option is
specified for a particular shape:
Note: If a value for the FYLD parameter has been specified, then that value will be
used. Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine the yeild strength
and tensile strength values for the steel. based on maximum thickness of
the individual elements of the section. Only for shear capacity calculation
web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile Strength is determined either from
FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Warning: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450 MPa or not.
If it is, a warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450 MPa.
The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it is strongly
recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for AS 4100:
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL
ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL
BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL
DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL
FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL
FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL
IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL
KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL
36 — STAAD.Pro
KX 0.75 MEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 MEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 MEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 MEMBER ALL
MAIN 1.0 MEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 MEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 MEMBER ALL
PHI 0.9 MEMBER ALL
RATIO 0.9 MEMBER ALL
SGR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKT 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKL 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 MEMBER ALL
UNB 3.4 MEMBER ALL
UNT 6.8 MEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER ALL
Hint: The member selection facility can be used to instruct the program to select a
different section if the specified section is found to be inadequate.
Code checking for an analytical member is done using forces and moments at every twelfth
point along the beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint)
and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of
the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
For each section station along a PMEMBER, section capacity checks are carried for design
actions at that station location. Member capacity checks are also carried out for each station.
For these the program searches each side of the station to find adjacent effective restraints
and design forces and moments. This allows the program to determine the segment / sub-
segment that the section station resides in, and then proceeds to calculate the member
capacities. Enough section stations should be included to capture all segments / sub-
segments for checking.
Note: When checking combined actions for the section capacities, the design actions at
the section station are used. However when checking combined actions for the
member capacities, the maximum forces from anywhere along the segment / sub-
segment being considered are used. This is as stipulated in AS 4100 8.2.
The output reports whether the member has PASSed or FAILed the design checks, as well as
the critical condition, critical load case, magnitudes of design actions for the most critical
cross-section location (distance from the start joint), and complete calculations for design.
The TRACK design parameter can be used to control the level of detail provided in the
output. Color-coded results can also be viewed in the GUI’s Post Processing Beam | Unity
Check page.
In some cases some of the output will report “N/A” values. This occurs where a calculation
does not apply to a member. For example if a member never goes into tension then no values
can be reported in the tension capacity output sections.
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for PMEMBER Design
uses x and y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal axes respectively.
These differ to STAAD.Pro local member axes, where z and y refer to major and
minor principal axes.
38 — STAAD.Pro
1B.10 Member Selection
This process incrementally checks increasing section profile sizes until a size is found that is
AS 4100 compliant, or the largest section has been checked. Only section profiles of the same
type as modeled are incrementally checked, with the increasing sizes based on a least weight
per unit length criteria.
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it.
Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited
to sections in the user table.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
The design calculations for Member Selection are the same as for Code Checking.
Hint: A Fixed Group command is also available, and can be used to force all members
within a user-defined group to take the same section size based on the most critical
governing design criteria for all members within that group. This is particularly
useful when you want to use the Member Selection feature, but want a group of
elements to have the same size. Refer to Section 5.49 of the Technical Reference
Manual for information on using this feature.
Note: Member Selection will change member sizes, and hence will change the structure’s
stiffness matrix. In order to correctly account for this, a subsequent analysis and
Code Check should be performed to ensure that the final structure is acceptable.
This may need to be carried out over several iterations.
Herein these are referred to as MEMBER Design and PMEMBER Design respectively.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
Traditionally STAAD.Pro performed code checks based on single analytical members (i.e.,
single members between two nodes). This implementation remains in place as shown in the
example in Section 1B.8. Physical Member (PMEMBER) Design on the other hand allows you to
group single or multiple analytical members into a single physical design member for the
purposes of design to AS 4100.
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the design of
single analytical members.
l STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer to
Section 5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
l Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar, members can be
manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Graphical Environment
manual for additional information.
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in STAAD.Pro’s
Modeling mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
40 — STAAD.Pro
to see if they are effective (i.e., if they are placed on the critical flange as per AS 4100 5.5).
Restraints not applied to the critical flange are ineffective and hence are completely ignored.
Refer to Section 1B.7 for further information on how user-defined restraints are applied using
the PBRACE design parameter, including available restraint types, and restraint layout rules.
Note: Segment and sub-segment layouts for PMEMBERs may change for different load
cases considered for design. Some restraints may be effective for one particular load
case as they are found to apply to the critical flange, however for another load case
may be found not to act on the critical flange, and found to be ineffective. In other
words the critical flange can change for each load case considered.
Typically the critical flange will be the compression flange, except for segments with a “U”
restraint at one end, in which case it will be the tension flange (as is the case for a cantilever).
The PMEMBER Design uses the following routine to determine effective cross-section
restraints for each load case considered:
i. first all user-defined restraints are checked to see if they are applied to the compression
flange, with those that aren’t ignored;
ii. next a check is made to see if a “U” type restraint is found at either end of the
PMEMBER. If this is the case then any adjacent “L” restraints up to the next “F”, “FR”,
“P” or “PR” restraint are also ignored, regardless of whether they are placed on the
critical or non-critical flange. Refer AS 4100 5.4.2.4.
The compression flange in step 1 of the routine above is calculated based on the bending
moments at the locations of the restraints being considered. If the bending moment is zero at
the same location as a restraint then the following method is used to determine which flange
is critical at the zero moment location:
a. If the zero moment is at the end of the PMEMBER, then the compression flange is
based on the bending moment at a small increment from then end;
b. If the zero moment is along the PMEMBER and is a peak value, then the compression
flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from that location;
c. If neither 1 or 2 above is valid, then the stiffer of the restraints at that location is taken.
The stiffness of different restraint types from the most stiff to least stiff are taken as
outlined in Table 1B.9-3.
Table 1B.6-Assumed Order of
Restraint Stiffness for Zero Moment
Critical Flange
Stiffness Restraint Type
Most Stiff FR
↓ F
↓ PR
↓ P
↓ L
↓ U
Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into segments
bounded by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U” effective restraints. These segments are then further
divided into sub-segments by effective “L” restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they provide
full lateral restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4.
For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined “U” restraints applied to both
top and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of “U” or “L” restraints only, an
error will be reported.
General Format
Where:
P Partially
restrained
42 — STAAD.Pro
Designation, Restraint Description
r Type
1
L Laterally Cannot be specified at the
restrained ends of design members.
FR Fully and
rotationally
restrained
PR Partially and
rotationally
restrained
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0
U
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L -
1.0 U PMEMB 3 7
Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this will be the
compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end, then it will be the
tension flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the critical
flange of a segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension).
l when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction), the critical
flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
Design physical members are divided into segments by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U” effective
section restraints. Segments are further broken down into sub-segments by “L” restraints, but
only if the “L” restraints are deemed to be “effective”. “L” restraints are only considered to be
effective when positioned on the “critical” flange between “F”, “P”, “FR” or “FP” restraints. If
an “L” restraint is positioned on the non-critical flange it shall be completely ignored.
Further, if an “L” restraint is positioned between a “U” and an “F”, “P”, “FR” or “PR” restraint,
it shall be ignored (regardless of whether it is on the critical or non-critical flange).
Design members must have either a F, P, FR, PR, or U restraint specified at both ends, for
both flanges.
l If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effective
length calculation as per 5.6.3.
l If ALM i.e., α_m is not provided, automatic calculation of ALM is done based on
moments within the segment.
l If SKR i.e., Kr is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on table 5.6.3(3)
considering restraint conditions are the end of the segment. If FR or PR is found at
only one of the end, Kr is assumed to be 0.85; if FR or PR is found at both the ends,
0.70 is used as Kr.
l If SKT i.e., Kt is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(1)
considering end restraints of the segment and section geometric information and
segment length.
l If SKL i.e., Kl is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(2)
considering end restraints of the segment, Load Height Position parameter, LHT and
shear force variation within the segment.
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same
configuration.
b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the program sorts
them automatically.
c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F).
44 — STAAD.Pro
d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched on each
side of the section along the critical flange.
e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location
determines the effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table below:
Table 1B.8-Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical Flanges
Case Flange Restraint Restraint on Effective
on a Critical a Non- Section
Flange Critical Restraint
Flange
I U U U
II 1 L Nothing L
2 Nothing L None
III 1 P or F Nothing or F
U
2 Nothing or P or F P
U
IV 1 PR or FR Nothing or FR
U
2 Nothing or PR or FR PR
U
V 1 L, P or F L, P, F, FR or F
PR
2 FR or PR L, P, F, FR or FR
PR
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
α compression ALB
b
member section
constant per AS 4100
6.3.3.
46 — STAAD.Pro
Automated Design PMEMBER Comments
Calculations Design
Parameter
Note: This may not literally be the top flange for say a column or beam with a beta angle.
The local member axes can be viewed in the GUI by selecting “Beam Orientation” in
the Diagrams Labels dialog (or Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut).
To automate kl using AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2), the longitudinal position of the load also needs to
be considered, i.e., as either “within segment” or “at segment end”.
To determine which of these applies, the shear forces at the ends of each design segment /
sub-segment is considered. If the shear force is found to have the same direction and
magnitude at both ends, it is assumed that loads act at the segment end.
If on the other hand the shear force at each end is found to have different directions or
magnitudes, loads are assumed to act within the segment.
Note: The above method includes an allowance for the self-weight of the member to be
considered, as the self-weight always acts through the shear center.
The net sum of the end shears is also used to determine if the load is acting in the positive or
negative local member y-axis direction. If LHT is set to 1.0 for top flange loading, the net sum
is used to determine whether the top flange loading is acting to stabilise or destabilise the
member for lateral torsional buckling. Negative local y-axis net loads act to destabilise the
segments / sub-segments, whereas positive local y-axis net loads act to stabilise segments / sub-
segments.
1B.12.6 Example
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL
LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL
SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL
48 — STAAD.Pro
Section 2
British Codes
Design of members per BS8110-1:1997 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you perform new concrete design using the RC
Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files to be run.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
52 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effects in the
analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure
presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section, the code recognizes that
additional moments induced by deflection are present and states that these 'secondary'
moments are accounted for by the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used
in the design for concrete in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects of these
second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA
analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure, the additional moments
induced in the structure are calculated. These can be compared to those calculated using the
formulation of BS8110.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to
be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If
shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along
with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will
calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third
definition above.
Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure includes critical
shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with
54 — STAAD.Pro
proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a total of two
shear regions at each, depending on the change of shear distribution along the beam. If
torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4.
A table of shear and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below shows a
sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following
annotations apply:
l LEVEL - Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more bar
groups.
l HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y
axis.
l BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size.
l FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar.
l TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar.
l ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook or
l (STA,END) continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and
square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This
causes slightly conservative results in certain cases. Below is a typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely
give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load
case.
==================================================================-
==
C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 SQRE SIZE - 300. X 300. MM,
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 940. SQ. MM.
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION
----------------------------------------------------
12 10 MM 1.047 1 EACH END
56 — STAAD.Pro
(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE)
----------------------------------------------------
|BRACED /SLENDER in z E.L.z= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|
|BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|
|END MOMS. MZ1= -12 MZ2= -24 MY1= -15 MY2= -31|
|SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ= 2 MOMY= 2 |
|DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL LOAD= 74|
|DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL CAP.= 74|
----------------------------------------------------
A typical example of element design output is shown in below. The reinforcement required to
resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The
following parameters are those applicable to slab design:
If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based on the Mx
and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the
design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy
moment to be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may
be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be
considered, an angle is given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element
local x-axis to the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and
shown in the design format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16 mm in both directions with the
longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS
-----------------------------------------
MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.
The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls. It performs
in-plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane bending design of
reinforcing. The shear wall is modeled by a single or a combination of Surface elements. The
use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It
greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output.
The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite
elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for user
specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The
shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required
horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending)
reinforcing and the link required due to out-of-plane shear.
CODE BRITISH
shearwall-parameters
END
The next table explains parameters used in the shear wall design command block above.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
58 — STAAD.Pro
Table 2A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
460
FYMAIN Yield strength of steel, in current units.
Mpa
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance,
the line 2 TO 5GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5.
As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12
command, there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all
13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are
not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the
finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY
and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES
and END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the
design. For British code the parameter is BRITISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST
command is followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear
walls and/or shear wall components.
The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane direction, the
wall is assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are
applicable. The default effective height is 1.5 times the clear height. User can change the
effective height. The limit for slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken
as 30.
60 — STAAD.Pro
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force
output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to the
foundation.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force
output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the
effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum
area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.
The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded with out-
of-plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at mid-
height. Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded column with uni-axial bending.
The minimum reinforcement percentage is as per table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement
percentage of vertical reinforcement is as per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated
as per the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is calculated as
per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering
vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the provisions of
clause 3.12.7.5.
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked against the
whole section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is
the in-plane shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded column under uni-axial
bending as per the provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal
bars, if necessary, is reported.
2A.7.3 Example
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall
design.
.
.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
.
62 — STAAD.Pro
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the
presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall panels.
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes,
meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing
divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
Where:
n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on the
surface perimeter,
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-
node segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface
where output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between
division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output
will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge).
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The
general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ...,si
Where:
a - distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the full
cross-section of the wall,
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from
the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
64 — STAAD.Pro
Definition of wall panels
ENDPANEL DEFINITION
where:
ptype - WALL
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General
syntax of the design command is as follows:
(...)
TRACK tr
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be:
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall or panels,
as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance
c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then
reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical
bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars.
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c from the
start of the panel.
66 — STAAD.Pro
2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-1:2000
Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 1: Code of practice for design - Rolled and welded
sections, Incorporating Corrigendum No. 1.
Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state
design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and
proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their
intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate.
The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that
in serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances
of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is
controlled by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or
other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the
program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See
section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to
universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover
plates, pipes, tubes, and angles, there is a provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange)
beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a complete description.
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider
four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for
the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY · KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b
axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be
specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG
parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY · KY and the effective length in
the b-b axis as LZ · KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or
RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
ST angle and
RA angle
USER table angles
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the
graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
68 — STAAD.Pro
2B.4.1 Universal Beams, Columns, and Piles
All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following examples
illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A
2B.4.3 Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The
designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may
be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
Note: Face-to-face double channels can not be used in a CHECK CODE command.
54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
2B.4.6 Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used
to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA
specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be
designed.
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis
specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the
tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section
properties must be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of gyration
about an individual sections’ principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual,
5.19 User Steel Table Specification)
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters
of the section. For example,
70 — STAAD.Pro
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is
used.
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and
not by any table designations.
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and
is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process.
2B.5.2 Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is
greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to
the compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the
appropriate design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take
into account the considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column
behavior. Based on data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that
sections such as tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to
imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the flanges. These research
observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves together with a
selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a particular case. Compression strength
for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex
C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson
constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the
member and appropriate design strength.
72 — STAAD.Pro
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section
4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be
satisfied – Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check
(4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been
outlined in BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2)
and Annex I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis
nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more
conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always
the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the
more appropriate criteria can be used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by the user or
x y yx
calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial
forces are checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to
zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic
sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition
reported despite the presence of moments.
2B.5.4 Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is
greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the
procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the
appropriate shear area for the section specified.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has been
incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a
member subjected to moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on the
section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. For calculation of
the buckling resistance moment, the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented
for all sections with the exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a
function of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness,
which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m , which is
LT
determined as a function of the loading configuration and the nature of the load (stabilizing,
destabilizing, etc).
For n ≥ 2t(D-2t)/A
A
2
2D (B − t )
S rx = 1 − n + n − 1
4(B − t )
A
For n ≥ 2t(B-2t)/A
A
2
2B (D − t )
S ry = 1 − n + n − 1
4(D − t )
A
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
74 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Beam divisions
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Moment calculation:
76 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Maximum of Lyy
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Set according to
PY * Design strength of steel
steel grade (SGR)
0.0 = Slenderness
not performed.
MAIN 0.0
1.0 = Main structural
member (180)
2.0 = Secondary
member. (250)
78 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Output details
4.0 = Deflection
Check (separate
check to main select
/ check code)
Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
1.0 = Closed
sections. Welding on
one side only (except
1.0 closed for webs of wide
WELD flange and tee
2.0 open sections)
2.0 = Open
sections. Welding on
both sides (except
pipes and tubes)
**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an
equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now
automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
2B.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods.
The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the
local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style
deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global
axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the
member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or
the end node of the member.
80 — STAAD.Pro
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
“Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the member. However, in
some situations, the “Deflection Length” may be different. A straight line joining
DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are
measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF.
2. LEG – follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastener
restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness.
The following values are available:
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in
BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To
define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the
BS5950 connection definition:
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as
well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
82 — STAAD.Pro
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression
strength p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified
c
angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the
compression strength p for the stronger principal axis.
c
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section
5.19) an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values
vv
corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an
entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set
according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a
function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and
particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the
program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in
current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ
(which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression
effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values
are required even though they are often the same values. The former relates to
compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the
unrestrained buckling length for compression checks.
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0, or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in
design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square
meter.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different
load list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the
parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 set.
The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly by the user
as a positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0 for MLT.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors by
defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference
Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification of GROUPS).
The nodes along the beam can then be defined as the location of restraint points with
J settings.
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper
flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained
(negative local Y) with a L setting.
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam:
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools > Create New
Group….
Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
84 — STAAD.Pro
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
Say that this member has been restrained in its’ major axis (local Y) only at the
ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at
node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained
at its ends. Hence:
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its’ ends against lateral torsional buckling
and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower
flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in
the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k M
amp s
mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this
load case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate
load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 TO 10
SWAY 6 _MAINBEAMS
l Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of
members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the
design requirements.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members
have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950
specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the
user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, except
profiles defined in GENERAL and ISECTION tables.
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design per BS5950 in
STAAD.Pro.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
86 — STAAD.Pro
2B.9 Member Selection
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has
been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section,
which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of
the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member
selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the
maximum and minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same
limitations as defined in section 2B.8 Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
TRACK
If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and
reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression
(PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design
results as shown in section 2B.9.
88 — STAAD.Pro
Elastic modulus : 1761.526 589.460
Effective modulus : 1960.000 895.000
Shear Area : 103.471 37.740
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000
Section Class : PLASTIC
Squash Load : 3975.00
Axial force/Squash load : 0.045
z-z axis y-y axis
Compression Capacity : 3551.7 2455.9
Moment Capacity : 519.4 234.3
Reduced Moment Capacity : 516.9 234.3
Shear Capacity : 1645.2 600.1
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)
x-x axis y-y axis
Slenderness : 44.153 77.203
Radius of gyration (cm) : 13.589 7.772
Effective Length : 6.000 6.000
LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 435.00, 6.000
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):
mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00
Mlt = 334.46 : Mx = 334.46 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.143 3 - 85.6 - - -
BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 - 85.6 - 334.5 -
BS-4.7 (C) 0.098 1 239.7 - - - -
BS-4.8.3.2 0.647 3 179.7 85.6 0.0 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
ANNEX I.1 0.714 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL parameter.
These are then used to check against the code clauses ‘4.4.3.2 - Minimum web thickness for
serviceability’ and ‘4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling’.
The following printout is then included if a TRACK 2.0 output is selected:
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118
N/mm2
d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause ‘4.4.5.2 - Simplified
method’ and the result is included in the ratio checks.
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter
UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance
with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the
SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL
identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may
choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling
check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
90 — STAAD.Pro
2B.13.2 Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2
The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of the member
defined by the BEAM parameter.
Where:
M is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i considered;
xi
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness λ . , see G.2.3,
c TC y
based on the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section within the
segment length L
Where:
0.5
1 + (2a / h s)
2
y= 2 2
1 + (2 a / h s) + 0.05( λ / x )
λ = Ly /ry
Where:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
Where:
Where:
D is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure
max
G.3;
D is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure
min
G.3;
92 — STAAD.Pro
2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5400:Part 3:1982
Steel, concrete and composite bridges Part 3. Code of practice for design of steel bridges and
Amd No. 4051 and Amd No. 6488.
Design of members per BS 5400:Part 3:1982 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design
Codes SELECT Code Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions.
determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated
based on the formula given under clause 9.9.2.2.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
94 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
1. 30 N/mm2
2. 40 N/mm2
3. 50 N/mm2
0. Grade 43
1. Grade 50
2. Grade 55
2C.7.2 I Section
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
2C.7.3 Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are
available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design is not
available in this portion of STAAD.
96 — STAAD.Pro
2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the British code BS8007:1987
Design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design
of the structure is carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the recommendations
given in BS8007.
Design of members per BS8007:1987 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions.
The information in this section is to be used in conjunction with the BS8110. See "British
Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110" on page 51
The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in accordance
with recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load cases are considered in
turn and a tabulated output is printed showing possible reinforcement arrangements.
12, 16, and 20 mm bars are considered with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175, and 200
mm. Within these spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed
under each bar size. Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load
cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed. Minimum reinforcement
is in any case checked and provided in each direction. Wood & Armer moments may
also be included in the design.
In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are calculated.
The first and every other occurring design load case is considered as a serviceability load
case and crack widths are calculated based on bar sizes and spacings proposed at the
ultimate limit state check.
Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated directly under
bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output indicating critical
serviceability load cases and moments for top and bottom of the slab is then produced.
Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available parameters, the
user is able to provide information on the type of slab, temperature range and crack width
limits.
Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of
reinforcements are calculated and printed in a tabulated form.
Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack widths are
calculated for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar size.
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under each bar
size.
These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but
give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used
values for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a
complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
1 = Suspended Slab
2 = Ground Slab
98 — STAAD.Pro
2D.3 Structural Model
Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modeled using finite elements.
Refer to Section 1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for information on the sign convention
used in the program for defining elements
It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis points
outwards away, from the center of the container. In this manner the "Top" of elements will
consistently fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will act in the positive
direction of the local z axis.
Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES command.
The following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm slab modeled with ten
elements.
UNIT MM
ELEMENT PROPERTIES
1 TO 10 THI 300.0
Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
l Z with Lips
l Pipe
l Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General | Property page of the graphical user
interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of the subject
code. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for
compliance with:
The tensile strength, P of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1
t
Pt = Aepy
Where:
Mz/Mcz ≤ 1
and
My /Mcy ≤ 1
Where
102 — STAAD.Pro
F is the applies tensile strength
t
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject
t
code
For sections symmetrical about both principal axes or closed cross-sections which are not
subjected to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be
obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the subject code
PEPcs
Pc =
ϕ + ϕ 2 − PEPcs
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural
buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following
equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
M c Pc
P ′c =
(M c +Pc e s)
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
α = 1, otherwise
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
Pc Mb F
C by M cy 1 − c
P Ey
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y
Ey
axis
C ,C are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
bz by
M , M , and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described
cz cy b
herein below.
Mcy = Syy x po
D Ys
po = 1.13 − 0.0019 w p y
t 280
Where
104 — STAAD.Pro
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should
o
not greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater
than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and the buckling
c
resistance moment of the beam, M
b
Then buckling resistance moment, M may be calculated as follows
b,
M EM y
Mb = ≤ Mc
ϕ B + ϕ B2 − M EM y
M is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p and elastic
Y y
modules of the gross section with respect to the compression flange Zc
Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed discussion regarding
the parameters used in the abovementioned equations.
pv = 0.6·py
Pv = A·min(pv , qcr)
Where:
to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause 5.5.2 of the subject code
Where:
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of
these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
106 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
0 – effect
should not
be included
1 – effect
should be
included
Values:
0 – Section
subject to
torsional
flexural
buckling
1 – Section
not subject
to torsional
flexural
buckling
108 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
110 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
0 – Do not
check
slenderness
ratio
1 – Check
members
resisting
normal loads
(180)
2 - Check
members
resisting self-
weight and
wind loads
(250)
3 - Check
members
resisting
reversal of
stress (350)
0 - Prints
only the
member
number,
section
name, ratio,
and
PASS/FAIL
status.
1 - Prints the
design
summary in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 1
2 - Prints
member and
material
properties in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 2.
In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different members. Member
numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section 230CLHS66X16,member numbers 3 TO 6 and 15
TO 19 have been assigned the section 230CLMIL70X30 and member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14
have been assigned the section 170CLHS56X18. These members have been designed as per BS
5950 Part 5. Other sections have been assigned from the AISI shapes database (American
cold-formed steel) and designed in accordance with that code.
112 — STAAD.Pro
2E.5.1 Solution
A. Bending Check
So that
Where:
And
So that
Which yields
6 6
4.649(10) ⋅ 9.19(10)
Mb = = 9.98(10)6N ⋅ mm
2
2.325(10) 10 + 2.325(10) 10 − 4.649(10)6 ⋅ 9.19(10)6
B. Compression Check
Buckling resistance
PEPcs
Pc = = 153, 782N
ϕ + ϕ 2 − PEPcs
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per clause 6.2.4 is
M c Pc
P ′c =
(M c +Pc e s)
Where:
And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of
s
the effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m
So that,
6
9.19(10) ⋅ 153, 782
P ′c = = 93, 788.7N
9.19(10) + 153, 782 38.24
6
( )
Compression ratio = 3,436.75/93,788.7 = 0.0366
114 — STAAD.Pro
Overall buckling check per 6.4.3
Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
Pc F F
C bx M cz1 − c C by M cy 1 − c
P Ez
P Ey
= 0.2773
Pv = A·min(pv , qcr)
2E.5.2 Comparison
Table 2E.2-Comparison for verification problem
Hand
Criteria STAAD.Pro Result Difference
Calculation
Hand
Criteria STAAD.Pro Result Difference
Calculation
STAAD SPACE
SET ECHO OFF
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 5 5 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0 5
2; 8 0 5 4;
9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8; 15
5 5 2;
16 5 5 4; 17 5 5 6; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0 10;
22 0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 7 8; 8 8 9; 9 9 10;
10 10 2;
11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16; 17 16
17; 18 17 18;
19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25 17 13;
26 10 18;
27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33 21 4;
34 4 19;
35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN
32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060
20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH
28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16
3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30
1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18
UNIT MMS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1
SUPPORTS
19 TO 22 PINNED
UNIT FEET
116 — STAAD.Pro
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 6.5E-006
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39
MEMBER TENSION
32 TO 39
UNIT FEET KIP
LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
MEMBER LOAD
3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5
JOINT LOAD
1 2 FX 0.6
2 4 FZ -0.6
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
UNIT KGS CM
PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16
PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28
UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISI
FYLD 55 ALL
CWY 1 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21
PARAMETER 2
CODE BS5950 COLD
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
2E.5.4 Output
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60 LOCATION: 609.60
|
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-|
MATERIAL DATA:
Yield strength of steel : 379.21 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile strength : 430.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm)
Section Name : 170CLHS56X18
Member Length : 60.96
Gross Area(Ag) : 5.45 Net Area (Ae): 4.58
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 237.27 21.93
Moment of inertia (Ie) : 235.46 19.42
Elastic modulus (Zet) : 27.85 5.20
Elastic modulus (Zec) : 27.55 10.42
DESIGN DATA:
z-z axis y-y axis
Compression Capacity (Pc) : 93.70
Moment Capacity (Mc) : 9.17 3.47
Shear Capacity (Pv) : 21.00 33.50
LTB Capacity (Mb) : 9.17
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE COMBINATION RATIO
BS-6.3 Compression ratio - Axial 0.037
BS-6.4 Bend-Compression ratio 0.278
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Z 0.236
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Y 0.006
BS-5.1 Biaxial Bending Ratio 0.241
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Z 0.168
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Y 0.003
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio 0.084
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio 0.000
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
118 — STAAD.Pro
Section 3
Canadian Codes
Design of members per CSA A23.3 1994 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
11 14 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 300mm diameter
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is
through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1).
Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments
will be multiplied before beginning member design. This second procedure allows
slenderness to be considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
Note: STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper
factored loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If
the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the
REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading
cases under one single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield
incorrect results for P-Delta Analysis in STAAD.Pro.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
122 — STAAD.Pro
Param- Default Description
eter Value
Name
LEVEL
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group.
HEIGHT
Height of bar level from the bottom of beam.
BAR INFOrmation
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and size.
FROM
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the rebar.
124 — STAAD.Pro
TO
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the rebar.
ANCHOR
(STA,END)
States whether anchorage, either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or
at the end (END) of the bar.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for
beams subjected to torsion.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as those for
beams in flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this purpose. These
moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical
Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as
longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement. The effective depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided.
The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT, and CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design.
Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not applicable to slab design. The output
consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement is not calculated because an
element most likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
Figure 3A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
126 — STAAD.Pro
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLB 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20
END CONCRETE DESIGN
Design of members per CAN/CSA-S16-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at
which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states
are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the probability of limits being surpassed is
acceptably low.
In the STAAD.Pro implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the
most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for
each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD.Pro implementation of
CAN/CSA-S16-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the
graphical user interface.
10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106
100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101
3B.4.3 S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M
and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the
CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the
decimal point should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and
S180X22.8 should be specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes
are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
130 — STAAD.Pro
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing.
The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
3B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a
25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle
specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the local z-axis
(see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-Y’ axis shown in the
CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to
correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse
angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting
the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.
25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16
80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles
with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
3B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification
instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width),
and TH(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches.
Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
15 TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5
132 — STAAD.Pro
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by
using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0
length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms
of current length unit.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 16.0 WT 8.0 TH 0.8
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
16 TA ST PIPE OD 16.0 ID 13.0
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that fall into the
category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only.
134 — STAAD.Pro
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher.
3B.6.1 Nomenclature
A = Area.
A = Effective area.
e
A = Area of flange.
f
A = Area of web.
w
b = Effective Flange width.
e
C = Compressive force in a member or component under factored load.
f
C = Factored compressive resistance.
r
C = Warping torsional constant.
w
C = Axial compressive load at yield stress.
y
D = Outside diameter of pipe section.
= Resistance factor
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit
state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the
member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective
net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter
NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two
limits states per Cl.13.2 of CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for
these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The
equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a
function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield
Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the
calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT,
KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1
using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ
and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss
members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local
buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed.,
1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines
for calculating this value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
4. The variable “n” in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other
shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are
applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive resistance should
be determined by either of the following equations.
136 — STAAD.Pro
a. Cr= ϕAe Fy (1+λ2n )-1⁄n
Where:
n = 1.34
λ = √(Fy /Fe )
Fe=(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section
shapes are as follows.
l For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
be= 200t/√(Fy )
be= 340t/√(Fy )
be= 670t/√((Fy )
D= 23000t/(Fy
Where:
n = 1.34
λye = √(Fye/F_e )
Fe=(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or diameter)-
ye
to-thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1.
Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped section.
Fye= 40000/(b/t)2
Fye= 448900/(b/t)2
Fye= 23000/(D/t)
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as
where
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes
such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31,
that a rational method, such as that given in SSRC’s Guide to Stability Design Criteria
of Metal Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of
AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed.
i. When both the web and compressive flange exceed the limits for Class 3 sections, the
member should be considered as failed and an error message will be thrown.
ii. When flanges meet the requirements of Class 3 but web exceeds the limits for Class 3,
resisting moment shall be determined by the following equation.
A h 1, 900
M ′ r = M r1 − 0.0005 w −
Af w
Mf/ ϕs
138 — STAAD.Pro
Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or 13.6 but not to
exceed My = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections = My
A h 1 − 0.65C f / (ϕCy )
M ′ r = M r1 − 0.0005 w − 1, 900
Af w
Mf/ϕs
Cy = A · Fy
iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges exceed the
limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as
Mr = ϕ · Se · Fy
Where:
l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle
section, effective length width
As per clause 13.6(b) the moment resistance for class-4 section shall be calculated as follows
M r = 1.15ϕM y1 −
0.28M y
Mu
Mr=ϕMu
When bending moment at any point within the unbraced length is larger than the larger
end moment or when there is no effective lateral support for the compression flange at one of
the ends of unsupported length-
ω2 = 1.0
k = Ratio of the smaller factored moment to the larger moment at opposite ends of the
unbraced length, positive for double curvature and negative for single curvature.
be= 670t/√(Fy )
l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200t/√(Fy )
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is no guide
line in the code for other sections.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial
bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the
additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using
amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the
summation of the left hand side of these equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 141), the member is considered
to have failed under the loading condition.
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction
equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is
determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical equation.
3B.6.5 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of
the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the
shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes)
exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the
section is considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness
ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01).
140 — STAAD.Pro
Checks for safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users
may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these
parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
CODE
1.0 = Perform
design for
moments at
twelfth points
along the beam.
Equal to 0.0 :
Calculate
Omega_2
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local
Y axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4
of code
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local
Z axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4
of code
142 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
2.0 = Check
slenderness ratio
only for column
buckling, not for
web (See Section
3B.6, Shear)
1.0 = Report
design strengths
also.
144 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along
the beam. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default),
design will be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels
the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case,
location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments
are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK
parameter.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed. Following is
a description of some of the items printed.
CR
Factored compressive resistance
TR
Factored tensile resistance
VR
Factored shear resistance
MRZ
Factored moment resistance (about z-axis)
MRY
Factored moment resistance (about y-axis)
CR1
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(a)
r
CR2
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
146 — STAAD.Pro
CRZ
SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C in that Clause)
RX
CTORFLX
Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5-91.
Problem
Given
Comparison
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of *
* Research Engineers, Intl. *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94
4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
7. UNIT MMS KN
8. JOINT COORDINATES
9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0
10. MEMBER INCIDENCES
11. 1 1 2
13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54
16. CONSTANTS
17. E STEEL ALL
18. POISSON 0.3 ALL
20. SUPPORTS
21. 1 PINNED
22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ
24. UNIT METER KN
25. LOAD 1 DEAD
26. MEMBER LOAD
27. 1 UNI GY -7
148 — STAAD.Pro
29. LOAD 2 LIVE
30. MEMBER LOAD
31. 1 UNI GY -15
33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL
34. 1 1.25 2 1.5
36. PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB
37. LOAD LIST 2
38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
----------------------------
UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM
MEMB LOAD GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS
1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2.08115 AT 400.00 LOAD 2 L/DISP= 384
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS ***********
40. LOAD LIST 3
41. PARAMETER
42. CODE CANADIAN
43. TRACK 2 ALL
44. UNL 1 ALL
45. FYLD 300000 ALL
46. BEAM 1 ALL
47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W410X54 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2+ 0.883 3
0.00 C 0.00 -250.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02
IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03
IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02
CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 2.732E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01 MRZ = 2.832E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02 VRZ = 4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no
density.
ST W410X54 8.00 4.203
PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000
----------------
TOTAL = 4.203
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
49. FINISH
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.
Problem
Given
150 — STAAD.Pro
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m
Comparison
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of *
* Research Engineers, Intl. *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106
2. *
3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
6. JOINT COORDINATES
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
9. MEMBER INCIDENCES
10. 1 1 2
11. *
12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 1 MZ 300
28. *
29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB
++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35
++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35
++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 300.00
2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 200.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. TRACK 2 ALL
36. FYLD 300000 ALL
37. LY 3.7 ALL
38. LZ 3.7 ALL
39. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W310X129 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2C 0.980 1
2000.00 C 0.00 300.00 0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.65E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02
IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03
IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
152 — STAAD.Pro
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03
CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.359E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.820E+03
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.672E+02 MRZ = 5.840E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 7.419E+02 VRZ = 1.505E+03
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 47.477 KL/RZ = 27.094 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 2.12E+01
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no
density.
ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000
----------------
TOTAL = 4.694
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
42. FINISH
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4-108.
Problem
Given
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the weak axis.
Comparison
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of *
* Research Engineers, Intl. *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108
2. *
3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING )
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
6. JOINT COORDINATES
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
9. MEMBER INCIDENCES
154 — STAAD.Pro
10. 1 1 2
11. *
12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 2 MX 100
28. 1 MZ 300
29. 1 MX 100
30. *
31. PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 6
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. CMY 2 ALL
36. CMZ 2 ALL
37. CB 1 ALL
38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
* 1 ST W310X143 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL CSA-13.8.2A 1.000 1
2000.00 C -100.00 300.00 0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.82E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02
IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 PZ = 2.41E+03
IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 PY = 1.11E+03
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
Reference
Problem
Given
Design forces
8.0 KN (Compression)
156 — STAAD.Pro
6.0 KNm (Bending-Z)
6.0 KN (Shear-Y)
6.0 KN (Shear-Z)
Section Properties(Sect_Class-4):
Area = 2766 mm 2
Thickness of web Tw = 7 mm
Thickness of flange Tf = 6 mm
Material
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Section Classification
Flange is Class 4.
(1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/ *Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) =
63.24
Web is Class 1.
As the web of the section meets the requirement of Class 3 and flange exceeds Class 3 limit,
flexural resistance should be calculated as per clause 13.5(c).iii.
158 — STAAD.Pro
Mrz1 = *Szeff*FYLD= 0.9*135367.88*300 =36549327.6 N-mm.
If the member is laterally unsupported major axis bending resistance is determined by clause
13.6(b).
Mu = (1.75*3.14/2000)*sqrt(205000*337.894X104*78846.154*3.7378X104 +
(3.14*205000/2000)4*337.894X104*1.752X10^10) =2.48X108
Mrz2 should not be more than Mrz1. Since, Mrz2 > Mrz1 in this example, Mrz2 = Mrz1.
Comparison
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro V8i SELECTseries2 *
* Version 20.07.07.XX *
* Proprietary Program of *
* Bentley Systems, Inc. *
* Date= AUG 17, 2010 *
* Time= 17: 6:23 *
* *
* USER ID: Bentley *
****************************************************
160 — STAAD.Pro
45. JOINT LOAD
46. 2 FX -8
47. PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 1
50. PARAMETER 1
51. CODE CANADIAN
52. CB 0 ALL
53. TRACK 2 ALL
54. FYLD 300000 ALL
55. CHECK CODE ALL
1 ST SECT_CLASS-4 (UPT)
PASS CSA-13.8.3B 0.760 1
8.00 C -6.00 6.00 0.00
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
162 — STAAD.Pro
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 57.222 KL/RZ = 31.904 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 2.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 6.000E+00 Z AXIS = 6.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 1.97E+01
56. FINISH
************************************************************
* For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact *
* Bentley Systems Offices at the following locations *
* *
* Telephone Web / Email *
* *
* USA: +1 (714)974-2500 *
* UK +44(1454)207-000 *
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158 *
* EUROPE +31 23 5560560 *
* INDIA +91(033)4006-2021 *
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 http://www.ctc-g.co.jp *
* CHINA +86 10 5929 7000 *
* THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 partha.p@reisoftwareth.com *
* *
* Worldwide http://selectservices.bentley.com/en-US/ *
* *
************************************************************
Design of members per S136-94 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
l Z with Lips
l Z without Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as
follows:
l Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable.
l 6.4.1 General,
l 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on
Initiation of Yielding,
l 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
l 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional
limitations,
l 6.4.5 Shear in Webs,
166 — STAAD.Pro
l 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
l Members in compression
Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly Symmetric Sections.
Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
168 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
170 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Design of members per CSA 086-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks whether
code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of CSA086-
01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library available in
STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in timber table.
For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD (depth) and ZD (width)
specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications from the built-in table.
The assignment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC option (Refer to Section 5.20 of the
Technical Reference Manual)
Following are the description of the different types of species combination available:
3D.4.2 Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
3D.4.4 Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
UNIT CM KN
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX
E 51611.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 2.5E-005
174 — STAAD.Pro
ALPHA 1.2E-011
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX MEMB 1
3D.4.6 Example
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
KD
Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2)
KH
System factor (Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01)
K_T
Treatment factor (Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01)
KSB
Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
-CSA086-01)
KSV
Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KSC
Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2
and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
K_SCP
Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to the grain
(Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSE
Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KST
Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and
6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KZB
Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZV
size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZT
size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
KZCP
size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table
5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
176 — STAAD.Pro
K_ZC
size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
CHIX
Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)
CV
shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
KN
Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of timber and
stress grade.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances.
The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one limit state.
The limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area.
The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF
(see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on this limit
state per Clause 5.5.9 of CSA086-01.
The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA 086-01
assigns different specified strength for gross and net section. The specified strength at
net section is slightly higher than the strength of the gross section. Therefore, Glulam
tension members are designed based on two limit states. The first one is the limit state
of yielding in the gross section. The second limit state involves fracture at the section
with the minimum effective net area. The net-section area may be specified by the user
through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Clause.6.5.11 of CSA086-01.
3D.5.3 Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01
and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable
3D.5.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and
6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross
section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y
& Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table
3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of
these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
178 — STAAD.Pro
Table 3D.1-Canadian Timber Design Parameters
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
180 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. The
code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical
condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 4.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.51.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Code Checking command.
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CAN
KD 0.99 ALL
KH 0.99 ALL
K_T 0.99 ALL
KSB 0.99 ALL
KSV 0.99 ALL
KSC 0.99 ALL
KSE 0.99 ALL
KST 0.99 ALL
KZB 0.99 ALL
KZV 0.99 ALL
KZT 0.99 ALL
KZCP 0.99 ALL
K_ZC 0.99 ALL
CV 0.99 ALL
KN 0.99 ALL
K_SCP 0.99 ALL
CHIX 0.99 ALL
RATIO 0.99 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Pu
Actual Load in Compression
Tu
Actual Load in Tension
Muy
Ultimate moment in y direction
Muz
Ultimate moment in z direction
V
Ultimate shear force
SLENDERNESS_Y
Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction
SLENDERNESS_Z
Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction
PY
Factored Compressive capacity in y direction
PZ
Factored Compressive capacity in z direction
T
Factored tensile capacity
MY
Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MZ
Factored moment of resistance in z direction
V
Factored shear resistance
SLENDERNESS
Allowable slenderness ratio
182 — STAAD.Pro
Reference
Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
===================================================================-
====
1 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728
1
214.00 C 0.00 0.00
0.0000
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY =
9000.000mm |
|
|
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV
= 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB
= 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000
CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
| Pu = 214.000
|
| Tu = 0.000
|
| Muy = 0.000
|
| Muz = 0.000
|
| V = 0.000
|
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737
|
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714
|
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)
|
| PY = 413.943
|
| PZ = 293.793
|
| T = 0.000
|
| MY = 0.000
|
| MZ = 0.000
|
| V = 0.000
|
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------|
Reference
Given
Length = 7,500 mm, Beam Spacing = 5,000 mm, Standard load condition, Dry service
condition, Untreated
184 — STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Reference
Given
Comparison
186 — STAAD.Pro
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 256.636 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Given
Comparison
| Pu = 114.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 26.178 |
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 26.178 |
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) |
| PY = 129.223
|
| PZ = 129.223
|
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Given
Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison
188 — STAAD.Pro
Output for Member Design
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)
***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1
0.00 T 0.00 49.20 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 0.900 |
| KZV = 0.900 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 49.200 |
| V = 49.200 |
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 4.511 |
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 2.158 |
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 79.800 |
| MZ = 79.732 |
| V = 46.170 |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Reference
Given
Comparison
190 — STAAD.Pro
Section 4
Cypriot Codes
Design of members per this code requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
196 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per DS412 1998 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these
parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
204 — STAAD.Pro
Section 6
Dutch Codes
Design of members per NEN 6770 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
1.0 = No fixity
CMN 1.0 0.7 = One end fixed, the other
free.
None
(Mandatory "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable
for local deflection
DFF
deflection
check, See Note 1d in Section 2B.6.
TRACK 4.0)
208 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Set
according
PY Design strength of steel
to steel
grade (SGR)
Steel Grade
0. Grade Fe 360
SGR 0.0
1. Grade Fe 430
2. Grade Fe 510
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
210 — STAAD.Pro
Section 7
European Codes
Design of members per EC2 ENV 1992-1-1:1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design
requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate
specific design properties to individual members considered in the design operation.
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a
negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to both the applied loads and
the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis to
be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD provides a number of
methods for analysis, allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be
considered.
The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided
in EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application Documents.
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by numerical
values provided in the input file.
Shear Modulus, G = E / 2 (1 + v)
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on γF, the partial safety factor for the action
under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable
values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
7A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the
member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case
is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed
symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is
then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance
for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of
EC2. This effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
7A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are
scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is
also identified and incorporated in the design.
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the above limits. It
is important to know that beams are designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The
moment MY is not considered in the design at all.
214 — STAAD.Pro
7A.6.2 Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause 4.3.2.4.3
where it is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending on the shear
distribution within the member it may be possible that nominal shear reinforcement will be
sufficient to cater for the design shear forces. If this is not the case an attempt is made to
identify regions where nominal reinforcement is insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is
then calculated to cover the excess design shear force.
The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also checked
and if exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output file.
7A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of
the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that
shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases
where this may not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The
output for the slab design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the
local x direction of the element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local
y direction of the element.
Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's
'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not
coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you must ensure this through
the numbering scheme of the elements. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of
16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior
faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in Section 1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
information.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
216 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
218 — STAAD.Pro
7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992]
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings.
Design of members per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: The DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code has now been officially superseded by EN 1993-1-
1:2005. Hence releases of STAAD.Pro subsequent to version SS3 (20.07.08.xx) will not
support this design code. The SS3 build will perform member design to this code
for legacy files but has this code removed from the design codes list in the GUI.
Users are advised to use the EN 1993-1-1:2005 version for Eurocode 3 design.
Hint: Design per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 is also available in the Steel Design mode in
the Graphical User Interface.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design
requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate
specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design
operation.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating
internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may
be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are
“Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which reflect the ability of the joints to
developing moments under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and
“Continuous” joint types can be assumed when carrying out global analysis.
The current version of EC3 DD implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 and has not been modified by any National Application
Document.
Note: National Annex documents are available for EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. See
"European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 235
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the
longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the
orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 7B.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
220 — STAAD.Pro
material partial safety factor Γm. The magnitude of Γm in STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to
all section types. A separate safety factor parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance
of a member to buckling and also has a default value of 1.1.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by
user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the action
f
under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values
for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
The EC3 DD design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that are of
Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.3.2 of the code. However, the design of members that have
a ‘Class 4’ section profile are limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE
ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. Also built-up user sections that are class
4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
Laced and battened members are not considered in the current version of EC3 DD design
module in STAAD.Pro.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material yield
strength and is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear capacity and the
corresponding shear checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain
full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation
required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic section modulus is used in
the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic
moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fibre of the
section. The elastic section modulus is used to determine the moment capacity for class 3
sections. Class 4 sections do suffer from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made
for the reduction in section properties before the moment capacity can be determined.
Further, because of interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment
resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value
of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In such cases
the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as contributing towards the
moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE
FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl. 5.3.5 of the
code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of the code.
The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length,
restraint conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral torsional buckling checks
involves the calculation of the ‘Elastic critical moment’, Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as
per the method given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section 5.4.6 of the
code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending and shear, the combined
bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per clause 5.4.7 of the code.
The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as per Cl 5.4.4
of the code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full section area is considered
in calculating the section capacity. However in case of class 4 sections, the ‘effective cross-
section’ is considered to calculate the compressive strength. Also any additional moments
induced in the section due to the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also
be taken into account as per clause 5.4.8.3 of the code. The effective section properties for class
4 sections will be worked out as given in Cl.5.3.5 of the code.
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for such
members. This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member is influenced
222 — STAAD.Pro
by a number of factors including the section type and the unbraced length of the member.
The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double
channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such
members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified
in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS
5950-1:2000 are used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider
four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for
the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY · KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b
axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be
specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG
parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY · KY and the effective length in
the b-b axis as LZ · KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or
RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 7B.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
necessary checks as per Cl. 5.4.8 of the code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl.
5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3
respectively. The effective section properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl.
5.3.5 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking
the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension
and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into
consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and
calculating an effective applied moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of
the code. In case of a combined axial compressive load and bending moment, the member
will be checked as per the rules in section 5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under
consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance,
then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of
the axial load on the bending resistance of the section. If the member is subject to a
combined shear, axial load and bending moment then the section capacity checks will be
done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single
angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out
the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro
uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members.
Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module.
Please refer to the note in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current
version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the
parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new
setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
The following table lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and
default values.
224 — STAAD.Pro
Table 7B.1-Steel Design Parameters EC3 DD
1. Check at location of
maximum Mz along beam
1.0 = No fixity
226 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1. Include additional PN EN
checks
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up
0.0 = Fe 360
1.0 = Fe 430
2.0 = Fe 510
0 = minimum
1 = intermediate
2 = maximum
4 = perform a
deflection check
7B.6.1 Notes
1. LEG – (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in
BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member
(Refer to section 5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter
should be assigned to the member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the
BS5950 connection definition:
228 — STAAD.Pro
Table 7B.2-LEG Parameter values
Clause Bold Leg LEG
Configuration Parameter
long 2.0
leg
long 6.0
leg
short 5.0
leg
short 4.0
leg
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as
well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression
strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified
angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the
compression strength pc for the stronger principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to Section 1.7.3 of the
Technical Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of
the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle
making up the pair.
2. BEAM
Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for
members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
Table 7B.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Val-
ue
230 — STAAD.Pro
CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Val-
ue
With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a CHECK CODE command
will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the
current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with
code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1, or
2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the GUI.
7B.7 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is
done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members
have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the
user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with
two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design module does not consider these
sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
7B.8 Member Selection
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis
has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest
section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected
will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed.
Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits
the maximum and minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same
limitations as defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
7B.9 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated
fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code which governs the design.
232 — STAAD.Pro
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks
that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case
that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for
the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data
used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity
etc.
Design of members per EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design
requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate
specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design
operation.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating
internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may
be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are
“Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which reflect the ability of the joints to
developing moments under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and
“Continuous” joint types can be assumed when carrying out global analysis.
The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of STAAD.Pro includes the following
National Annexes viz.
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA parameter that is
set by the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3. See "European Codes -
National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 281 for a description of the NA
parameter.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the
longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the
orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 7C.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
See "Example of a TRACK 2 output" on page 278 for an example of how this appears when Y is
up (default).
7C.2 Analysis Methodology
236 — STAAD.Pro
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by
user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on γ , the partial safety factor for the action under
f
consideration. You are allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and
their use in various load combinations.
The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that
are of Class 1, 2, or 3 as defined in section 5.5 of the code. However, the design of members that
have a Class 4 section profile are limited to:
l wide flange
l tee
l single channel
l single angle
l rectangular hollow sections
l circular hollow sections
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of
EC3 design in STAAD.Pro, unless they are defined as any of the section types given above.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version of EC3
(EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro. The current version also does not support the design
of tapered section profiles or I-Sections with top and/or bottom plates.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or
capacities. Member selection is done on the basis of selecting the most economic section on
the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take
care of the detailing requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local
effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl. 6.2.2.5
of the code.
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters
listed in Table 7C.4. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most
circumstances. However, you should control the design and verify results through the use of
the design parameters.
Compression members will be checked for axial capacity of the cross section in addition to
lateral buckling/stability. The cross section capacity will be checked as given in section 6.2.4 of
the code.
Lateral stability of a pure compression member will be checked as per the method given in Cl.
6.3 of the code. The compression member stability will be verified as:
N Ed
≤ 1.0
N b ,Rd
238 — STAAD.Pro
χA f y
Nb, Rd =
γ M1 for Class 1, 2, or 3 cross-sections
χ A efff y
Nb, Rd =
γ M1 for Class 4 cross-sections
Where:
χ is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves used to
evaluate the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based on the cross section
type and the steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when selecting the
buckling curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on the SGR design
input parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 261). Even if you have specified a
custom yield strength (using the PY parameter), the choice of a buckling curve will
be based on the value of SGR parameter.
Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural buckling are
checked for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional slenderness ¯λ for these
T
members is evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993 code. The maximum slenderness among the
flexural buckling slenderness, torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used
to evaluate the reduction factor, χ, for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N
cr,
, and the elastic torsional-flexural buckling load, N , are evaluated based on the method
T cr,TF
given in the NCCI “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes” (unless otherwise specified by a particular National Annex). The effective
length for the members can be controlled using the KZ, KY, LZ and LY parameters. If these
parameters are specified, the effective length will be calculated as KZ*LZ for length about the
Z-Z axis and KY*LY for length about the Y-Y axis. By default, the effective length will be taken
as the member length.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels, or
Tee sections and does not provide a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In
these cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS
5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 5950-
1:2000 are used in the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider
four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for
the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY · KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b
axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be
specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG
parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY · KY and the effective length in
the b-b axis as LZ · KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or
RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
ST angle and
RA angle
USER table angles
Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional Buckling
resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling resistance moment M will
b,Rd
be calculated as:
fy
M b, Rd = χLT Wy
γ M1
Where:
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction factor is
LT
240 — STAAD.Pro
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code depending on the
section type. For I sections, the program will by default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute
χ and for all other sections the program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a
LT
particular National Annex has been specified, the program will check if the
National Annex expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I
sections. If so, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s) included in
Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table 6.5). For all other cases the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to calculate χLT
through the MTH design parameter. Setting MTH to 0 (default value)
will cause the program to choose Cl.6.3.2.3 for I Sections and Cl 6.2.3.2
for all other section types. As mentioned above, if the National Annex
expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include sections other than I Sections, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by default.
When using Cl. 6.3.2.3 to calculate χ , the program will consider the correction
LT
factor kc (Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2006) based on the value of the KC parameter
in the design input. By default the value of KC will be taken as 1.0. If you want
the program to calculate kc, you must explicitly set the value of the KC parameter
to zero.
The non-dimensional slenderness λ (used to evaluate χ ) for both the above cases is
LT LT
evaluated as:
W yf y
λLT =
M cr
Where:
M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-1-1 does
cr
not however specify a method to evaluate M . Hence, the program will make use
cr
of the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to evaluate M by
cr
default.
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the raw EN
1993-1-1:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If a National
Annex has been specified, the calculation of M (and λ ) will be
cr LT
done based on the specific National Annex. (See "European Codes -
National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 281 for
Where:
Vc, Rd = Vpl, Rd =
(
Av fy / 3 )
γ M0
A is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as given in
v
Cl. 6.2.6(3) of the code.
Shear Buckling
For sections that are susceptible to shear buckling, the program will perform the shear
buckling checks as given in Section 5 of EN 1993-1-5. The shear buckling checks will be done
only for I –Sections and Channel sections. Shear stresses induced from torsional loads are
taken into account while performing torsion checks.
The susceptibility of a section to shear buckling will be based on the criteria given in Cl 5.1(2)
of EN 1993-1-5 as is as given as follows:
a. For unstiffened webs, if hw/t > 72ε/η, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
242 — STAAD.Pro
χ wf ywh wt
Vbw , Rd =
3 γ M1
Where:
η = 1.2 for steel grades up to and including S 460 and = 1.0 for other steel
grades
λw < 0.83/η η η
hw
λw =
86.4 ⋅ t ϵ
b. For stiffened webs, if hw/t > 31·E√kτ/η, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistances considers tension field action of the web and flanges acting as
struts in a truss model. This is calculated as:
η f yw wt
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd + Vbf , Rd ≤
3 γ M1
Where:
h ft f2f yf
2
M
Vbf , Rd = 1 − Ed
cγ M 1 M f ,Rd
b is the width of the flange which provides the least axial resistance, not
f
to be taken greater than 15εtf on each side of the web.
t is the thickness of the flange which provides the least axial resistance.
f
A and A are the areas of the top and bottom flanges, respectively.
f1 f2
1.6b ft f f yf
2
c = a 0.25 +
t h w2f yw
The following equation must be satisfied for the web shear buckling check to pass:
VEd
η3 = ≤ 1.0
Vb ,Rd
Where:
Note: The shear forces due to any applied torsion will not be accounted for if the TOR
parameter has been specifically set to a value of 0 (i.e., ignore torsion option).
If the stiffener spacing has not been provided (using the STIFF parameter), then the program
assumes that the member end forms a non-rigid post (case c) and proceeds to evaluate the
minimum stiffener spacing required.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or later.
General
Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) gives very limited guidance for the analysis and design of
torsion members. While both elastic and plastic analyses are permitted generally, the design
analysis methods for torsion discussed within EC3 are primarily based on elastic methods.
Also, only the first yield design resistance is specifically discussed for torsion members.
Furthermore, there is no guidance on section classification nor on how to allow for the effects
of local buckling on the design resistance for combined torsional effects. EC3 also does not
specifically deal with members subject to combined bending and torsion and loosely states
that the yield criteria (Eqn 6.1 in the code) can be used for elastic verification.
244 — STAAD.Pro
The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication “P057: Design of
members subject to combined bending and torsion”. Though this publication is based on the
British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this document are applied in the context of
Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in the
process of updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3. Hence
this method might be subject to modifications subject to the publication of a newer
version of P057. The NCCI document “SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion” will also be
referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this clause is used
primarily for this implementation.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of torsion and
lateral torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a condition in Appendix A.
Therefore, STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6 to check for members subject to
combined torsion and LTB.
l Cl. 6.2.7(1)
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
l Cl. 6.2.7(5)
l EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output for all torsion
checks. Also any distortional deformations and any amplification in the torsional or
shear stresses due to distortions will be neglected by the program.
l Clause 6.2.7(1)
States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T at each
Ed
cross section should satisfy:
Where:
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
States that:
For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear
resistance accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from V
pl,Rd
to V and the design shear force should satisfy:
pl,T,Rd
VEd / Vpl,T,Rd ≤ 1.0
The code also gives means to evaluate V in equations 6.26 to 6.28. These
pl,T,Rd
equations, however, only deal with I/H sections, Channel sections, and structural
hollow sections (RHS, SHS, CHS). Therefore, the application of Cl. 6.2.7(9) is only
performed for these section profiles.
l Cl 6.2.7(5)
States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may be used for
elastic verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the various actions on the
cross section and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for EC3 design:
I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for
torsional effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to Cl. 6.2.7(5) of
EN 1993-1-1.
II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the member. All
four of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed.
You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or group of
members. This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION. The TORSION parameter
set to zero by default, which results in torsion checks only being performed if the member is
subject to torsional moments (i.e., for this default setting, the program will ignore torsion
checks if there is no torsional moment in the member). Setting the value of the TORSION
parameter to three (3) will cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed
output (i.e., TRACK 2) will indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular member.
The details of setting the values to one (1) or two (2) and the corresponding checks performed
are as described below. See "Design Parameters" on page 261 for additional details.
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the appropriate
checks even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In such cases, the
program will perform the checks with a value of zero for the torsional moment.
This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects per Cl. 6.2.7(5).
Any warping stresses that may develop due to the end conditions will be ignored for this
option. The program will consider the forces (including torsion) at various sections along the
246 — STAAD.Pro
length of the member and for each section, will calculate the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at
various points on the cross section. The location and number of points checked for a cross
section will depend on the cross section type and will be as described below.
The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as given below:
f y / γ M0 + f y / γ M 0 − f y / γ M0 f y / γ M 0 + 3 f y / γ M 0 ≤ 1
Where:
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading conditions (excluding
hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence is taken as zero.
Where:
T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a cross section as
shown in figures below:
Doubly
symmetric
wide flange
profile
Pipe
profiles
α=
tan-1
(M
z
/My )
Tube
profiles
248 — STAAD.Pro
Shape Section Sketch
Channel
profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design output.
This method performs a detailed torsional analysis of a member depending on the torsion
loading conditions and the support conditions at the member ends. This method is based on
the SCI publication P057 and includes any warping stresses (direct warping stresses and
warping shear stresses) depending on the end conditions of the member. This implementation
considers seven different cases of loading and end conditions as given in publication P057 –
Section 6. The loading/end conditions for a member are specified by the use of the CMT design
parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 261 for parameter values and descriptions).
All the equations used to evaluate the torsional moments and associated stresses are as given
in Appendix B of P057. The resultant stresses are evaluated at various sections along the length
of the member and the following checks will be performed:
In general, the torsion at any section T is resolved into two components, viz.
Ed
The pure torsional (St. Venant’s) moment (T ) and
t,Ed
The warping torsional moment(T )
w,Ed
Therefore,
Where:
φ’ and φ’’’ are the first and third derivates of twist (φ ), respectively, and
depend on the end conditions and loading. These are evaluated from the
equations in Annex B of P057 and are based the specified CMT parameter.
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be used to
evaluate T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate φ’’’. Therefore, Annex B
wrd
of P057 is used.
The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure torsion
resistance and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance (T ) and the
t,Rd
warping torsional resistance (T ) are evaluated as:
w,Rd
For closed sections:
Tt,Rd = 2 · Ac · t · τmax
Where:
Tt,Rd = τmax · J / t
Where:
Where:
The check according to Cl 6.2.7(1) will then be performed to ensure that the following
conditions are satisfied:
Tt,Ed / Tt,Rd ≤ 1
Tw,Ed / Tw,Rd ≤ 1
TEd / TRd ≤ 1
250 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 6.2.7(9) – Plastic shear resistance due to torsion
STAAD.Pro checks for shear resistance of a section based on Cl. 6.2.6 for EC3 and the plastic
shear resistance (in the absence of torsion) is evaluated as:
Vpl, Rd =
(
Av f y / 3 )
γ M0
Where:
τ ,Ed τ w ,Ed
Vpl, T , Rd = 1 − − Vpl, Rd
(
1.25 f y / 3 / γ M0 ) (f y / 3 ) / γ M0
τ ,Ed
Vpl, T , Rd = 1 −
f y / 3 / γ M 0 pl, Rd
V
( )
Where
The shear stresses due to warping can be ignored as they will be insignificant and
hence:
Where:
For I and H sections, the web will not be subject to warping stresses and therefore
warping shear can be ignored (τ =0).
w,Ed
The stress due to pure torsion is evaluated as:
τt,Ed = G·t·φ’
Where:
Note: Although the maximum stress is at the thickest section of the profile, the
program uses the web thickness for this clause (since the shear capacity is
based on the web area) unless the load is parallel to the flanges, in which
case the flange thickness is used.
For channel sections that are free to warp at the supports and, thus, are not subject to
warping stresses:
τw,Ed = E·Sw·φ’’’ / t
Where:
Eurocode 3 gives yield criterion as per eqn. 6.1 and STAAD.Pro uses the yield criterion given
in EC-3. When a member is subject to combined bending and torsion, some degree of
interaction occurs between the two effects. The angle of twist caused by torsion is amplified
by the bending moments and will induce additional warping moments and torsional shears.
Account must also be taken of the additional minor axis moments produced by the major
axis moments acting through the torsional deformations, including the amplifications
mentioned earlier.
For members subject to bending and torsion, the stresses are evaluated as follows:
252 — STAAD.Pro
Direct bending stress (major axis): σbz = Mz / Zz
Where:
Shear stresses due to torsion and/or warping is evaluated as described above for Clause 6.2.7(9).
Check for yield (capacity checks) is then done according to Eqn 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, as
described for the Basic Stress Check (TORSION = 1):
Clause EC-3:6 App A – Check for combined Torsion and Lateral Torsional
buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral torsional
buckling) and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-6: 2007. Note that this
interaction equation does not include the effects of any axial load.
Warning: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published for this case
and work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for torsion in a
member with large axial load.
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z axis,
mz
according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
0.2T w ,Ed
k w = 0.7 −
T w ,Rk / γ M 1
M z,Ed
k zw = 1 −
M z,Rk / γ M1
1
kα =
1 − M y ,Ed / M y ,cr
M and M are the design values of the maximum moment about the y-y
y,Ed z,Ed
and z-z axis, respectively.
M is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the y-y axis.
y,cr
T is the design value of the warping torsional moment.
w,Ed
T is the characteristic value of the warping torsional resistance moment.
w,Rk
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling according to 6.3.2 of EN
LT
1993-1-1.
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be used for
torsion can be set by using the EFT design parameter.
When a member is subject to a combined axial load and a bending moment, the program
evaluates a reduced moment capacity based on Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. For Class 1, 2, and 3
sections, the program evaluates the reduced moment from the equations given in Cl. 6.2.9.1 of
the code. For class 4 sections, the interaction equation given by equation 6.44 are checked.
In the case of members subject to axial load and biaxial bending, the program will consider
the interaction equation 6.41 of the code.
Note: By default, the program will use the values of the constants ‘α’ and ‘β’ as given in
the code for the different sections types. However, you can override these values
using the ALPHA and BETA design parameters (See "Design Parameters" on page
261).
Note: The program uses the parameter ELB (See "Design Parameters" on page 261) to
override the Cl.6.2.9 checks for combined axial load and bending case. When
specfied as 1, the program uses the more general equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1,
instead.
When a member is subject to a combined axial load, shear force, and a bending moment, the
program evaluates the reduced yield strength as given in Cl 6.2.10 (3) of the code. The
reduction in the yield strength is done only when the applied shear force exceeds 50% of the
254 — STAAD.Pro
design shear resistance V . This reduced yield strength is then used to evaluate the reduced
pl,Rd
moment capacity of the section.
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-existent axial
load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section. The
EN 1993 design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the
necessary checks as per Cl. 6.3.3 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking
the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension
and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into
consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and
calculating an effective applied moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 6.2.9 of
the code. In case of a combined axial compressive load and bending moment, the member is
checked per the rules in section 6.3.3 of the code. The program checks to ensure that both the
interaction equations 6.61 and 6.62 of the code are satisfied. The interaction factors kzz, kyy,
kzy & kyz will be evaluated using Annex B of EN 1993-1-1 by default. Hence for the EN 1993-1-1
code in STAAD.Pro (without National Annexes), uses Annex B. The choice between using
Annex A and Annex B will be based on the choice specified by a particular National Annex, if
used. If the National Annex itself gives a choice between Annex A and Annex B, the program
uses Annex B to evaluate the interaction factors.
Note: EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double
channels or Tee sections and does give a method to evaluate the slenderness of such
members. In these cases, the Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1) design module of STAAD.Pro
uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these
members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3
design module. See "Single Angel Sections" for ST and RA angle specifications.
Note: Laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of
EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters.
EC3-6 deals with four types of ultimate limits states: plastic limit state, cyclic capacity limit
state, buckling limit state, and fatigue. The following are considered by STAAD.Pro:
l LS1 – Plastic limit state: Deals with the condition when the capacity of the structure is
exhausted by yielding of the material.
l LS3 – Buckling Limit state: Deals with the condition in which the structure (or shell)
develops large displacements normal to the shell surface, caused by loss of stability
under compressive and/or shear membrane stresses.
The limit state verification is made based on the “Stress design” method described in EC3-6.
The stress design approach takes into account three categories of stresses:
l Primary stresses: Stresses that are generated for the member to be in equilibrium with
the direct imposed loads.
l Secondary stresses: Those that are generated for internal compatibility or for
compatibility at supports due to imposed loads or displacements (e.g., temperature,
settlement etc.)
l Local stresses: Local stresses generated due to cyclic loading (or fatigue).
Only the primary stresses are considered the program. The primary stresses considered are
those generated due to axial loads, bending, shear and /or a combination of these conditions.
Note: In the context of slender pipe section design for the Eurocode 3 module, the
secondary and local stresses can be neglected since the loads and corresponding
stresses dealt with in the design engine are largely direct and shear stresses.
circumferential
around the circumference of the circular cross
section (θ)
meridional
along the length of the member (x)
normal
perpendicular to the tangential plane formed by
the circumferential and meridional directions
(n)
and the corresponding membrane stresses will follow the convention given below:
Figure 7C.3 - Nomenclature for membrane and transverse stresses in Slender CHS sections
256 — STAAD.Pro
Stress Design
Stress checks are made based on the “Stress design” method as per Section 8.5 of the code. This
section deals with the buckling strength of the member (LS3). The principle is to evaluate the
membrane stresses due to the applied loads and then compare that to the buckling strength,
which is evaluated giving due consideration for local buckling effects.
The membrane stresses are evaluated as given in Annex A of the code. The pipe section is
considered as an unstiffened cylindrical shell.
i. Meridional Stresses:
1. Axial load
Fx = 2·π·r·Px
σx = -Fx /(2·π·r·t)
M = π·r2 ·Px,max
σx = ±M/(π2 ·r·t)
1. Transverse force, V
V = π·r·Pθ,max
τmax = ±V/(π·r·t)
Mt = 2π·r2 ·Pθ
Where:
The buckling strength of A slender pipe section is evaluated using the method given in section
8.5.2 ofEC3-6. The design buckling stresses (buckling resistance) are calculated separately for
axial, circumferential, and shear. The circumferential stresses are ignored in STAAD.Pro.
The naming convention and the coordinate axis used will be as given in the following
diagram:
Figure 7C.4 - Naming convention and coordinate system used for the buckling stress of a slender CSH
section
Note: ΓM1 will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.
Where:
Where:
χ = 1 when λ ≤ λ
0
η
χ = 1 − β
λ −λ0
P − λ 0 when λ < λ < λ
λ
0 P
χ= α/λ2 when λ ≤ λ
P
Where:
258 — STAAD.Pro
The meridional buckling parameters the factors α and β are evaluated per section D.1.2.2 of
EC3-6.
Note: A ‘Normal’ fabrication quality will be assumed when evaluating the fabrication
quality parameter as given in table D.2 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is
set using the FAB design parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
The elastic critical buckling stress, σ and the factors α and β are evaluated per Annex D of
x,cr
EC3-6. The details are as given below:
Short ω ≤ 1.7
Where:
l
ω=
rt
Where:
Note: For a long cylinder, there are two separate methods that can be used
to evaluate the C factor: Eqns D.9/10 and Eqn D.12. Initially the
x
program evaluates C based on the maximum from equations D.9 and
x
D.10. However, for long cylinders that satisfy the conditions in
equation D.11, the program will also work out Cx based on equation
D.12 and then choose the minimum obtained from D.12 and D.9/10.
Note: γM1 will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.
Where:
Where:
Short ω ≤ 10
Where:
l
ω=
rt
1
τxθ, Rcr = 0.75ECτ r
ω
Where:
Note: A ‘Normal’ fabrication quality will be assumed when working out the
fabrication quality parameter as given in table D.6 of the code, unless
the fabrication quality is set using the FAB design parameter.
The buckling strength verification will be performed so as to satisfy the following conditions:
σx,Ed ≤ σx,Rd
260 — STAAD.Pro
For shear stresses:
τxθ,Ed ≤ τxθ,Rd
For a combined case of axial and shear stresses acting together, an interaction check will be
done according to equation 8.19 of the code as below:
kx kτ
σx ,Ed τ
σ + xθ ,Ed ≤1
x ,Rd τ xθ ,Rd
Where:
kτ = 1.75 + 0.25 · χτ
Depending on the model being designed, you may have to change some or all of the parameter
default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the n setting must be
compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 7C.4 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default values.
Table 7C.2-Steel Design Parameters EC3 EN
262 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
1.0 = No fixity
264 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
1. Class A – Excellent
2. Class B – High
3. Class C – Normal
0. I-Section
1. Single Channel
4. Angle Section
5. Tee Section
266 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
LVV Max. value of Leg length for Lvv (length about v-v-
Lyy axis of single angle section), as per Lyy.
Used for slenderness calculations.
1. Use Cl.6.3.2.2
2. Use Cl.6.3.2.3
268 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up
270 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
2. Detailed results.
Notes:
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods.
The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the
local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style
deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global
axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the
member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or
the end node of the member.
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
“Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the member. However, in
some situations, the “Deflection Length” may be different. A straight line
joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
272 — STAAD.Pro
D = Maximum local deflection for members 1, 2, and 3.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not
perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no
default value for DFF (see Table 2B.1).
2. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Val-
ue
With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a BEAM CHECK command
will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the
current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with
code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1
or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CODE CHECK MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
274 — STAAD.Pro
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical interface.
4. CMT Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
6 Concentrated Torque in
cantilever. End Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the distance at
which the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start of the
member. This can be done by using the ALH design parameter. The ALH
parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of the point torque (from the
start of the member) to the length of the member. This parameter will have
a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the center of the span) and will
accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
Note: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding
this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no
longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files that use GB1 parameter
will indicate an error message and you will be required to substitute GB1 with GM1,
in accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7C.7 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding
National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members
have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the
user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with the
exception of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently excluded since the option of Tapered
section design is currently not supported in the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design
module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS, TEE,
SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS.
276 — STAAD.Pro
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module. The program
will design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you are given the option to
choose a ‘section type’ to be considered while designing the member. Refer to the description
of the GST design parameter in Section 7C.6 for details.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same
limitations as defined in Section 7C.7.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic or as the limitations specified in Section 7C.7.
7C.9 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated
fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks
that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case
that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for
the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data
used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity
etc.
If an NA parameter (other than 0) has been specified and if the particular National Annex
requires additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (e.g., The Dutch
National Annex), the respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses will be listed
along with the critical ratios and the forces that were used for these clause checks.
Note: The results and output follow the axis convention as described in Section 7C.1.3
z-axis y-axis
278 — STAAD.Pro
Moment of inertia : 30820.004 9239.001
Plastic modulus : 2149.000 939.100
Elastic modulus : 1926.250 615.933
Shear Area : 81.998 51.728
Radius of gyration : 13.823 7.568
Effective Length : 500.000 500.000
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) EUROCODE NO.3 /2005
Section Class : CLASS 1 Section class as per Table 5.2
Squash Load : 4435.75 Max. cross section capacity (A · f /GM0
y
Axial force/Squash load : 0.006
GM0 : 1.00 GM1 : 1.00 GM2 : Partial safety factors used
1.10
z-axis y-axis
Slenderness ratio (KL/r) : 36.2 66.1
Compression Capacity : 4078.2 3045.5
Tension Capacity : 4435.8 4435.8
Moment Capacity : 591.0 258.3
Reduced Moment Capacity : 591.0 258.3
Shear Capacity : 1301.9 821.3
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment MB = 591.0
co- Factor C1 used in M calculations and End restraint factor (corresponds to the CMN design
cr e-
parameters
fficients
C1 & K : C1 =2.578 K =1.0, Effective Length= 5.000
Elastic Critical Moment for LTB, Mcr = 1541.5
Critical Load For Torsional Buckling, NcrT = 13898.0
Critical Load For Torsional-Flexural Buckling, NcrTF = 13898.0
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD Max. ratio, loadcase, & section forces for each clause check
FX VY VZ MZ
MY
EC-6.3.1.1 0.008 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.2.9.1 0.020 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.3-661 0.035 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.3-662 0.045 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.2 LTB 0.017 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
_________________________
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
The parameter NA sets the default material gamma factors and any additional changes outlined
in the country specific National Annex such as specific equations or methods. These are
described for each National Annex document in the following sections.
The output file printout has been updated to indicate which National Annex (if any) has been
used in a code check / select process (For all TRACK settings).
Design of members per EC3 National Annexes requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Where: f1 represents the number designation for a specific country's National Annex:
Table 7D.1-Table 5B1.2(B) - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex
NA Value Country
NA Value Country
6. Click Add.
This will insert the following commands into the STAAD input file:
282 — STAAD.Pro
CODE EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA n
Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3.
A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the output file
(*.ANL) with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.
Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the
corresponding clauses in the D-NA.
Note: Clause 6.3.2.4 deals with a simplified assessment method for beams. STAAD.Pro only
uses the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 in EC-3) and therefore this
section is ignored.
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Class 1 and class 2 I section profiles must satisfy the interaction formulae given in tables 10 &
11 of NEN 6770.
Table 10 Provides interaction checks for bending about the major axis (All necessary terms
and formulae are described below):
Where:
285 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 7D.2 - Definition of A
w
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf
1. If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 · a1 · Npl;d check equation 11.3-5
2. If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 · a1 · Npl;d check equation 11.3-6
3. IfVy;s;d > 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 · a1 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-7
4. If Vy;s;d > 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 · a1 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-8
Where:
W = plastic section modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
pl;z;d
Nv;u;d = Npl;d – 2·(1 - q)·bf · tf · fy;d
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to satisfy the
interaction equations in Table 13.
1. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a3 · Npl;d check equation 11.3.22
2. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a3 · Npl;d check equation 11.3.23
3. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a4 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-24
4. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a4 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-25
Where
h = height of section
A = area of section
h f y ;d
Vz ; pl ; d = Vz ; cl ; d = A
b +h 3
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the interaction
equations given in table 12.
287 — STAAD.Pro
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.17
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.18.
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 285 of this document for equations to derive
Vz;s;d
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above equations
with ‘y’ (should be the same of CHS sections).
Section 11.3.2 in general deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear. The general
condition to be satisfied in this case is given by equation 11.3-31 of NEN 6770
a1 a2
M y ;s ;d M z;s ;d
β 0 + β1 ≤1
M N ;V ;y ;u ;d M N ;V ;z;u ;d
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables 14 and 15 of
NEN 6770 respectively.
1. Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.32
2. Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.33
3. Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-34
4. Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-35
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 285 for equations to evaluate Vz;s;d, My;pl;d,
Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vz;pl;d.
1. Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.36
2. Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.37
3. Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-38
4. Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-39
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 285 for equations to evaluate Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d,
Npl;d, Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vy;pl;d.
See table 16 for α1, α1, β0 and β1 use in tables 14 and 15.
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see
description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 17 of NEN 6770.
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 285 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d,
and Npl;d use in equations 11.3.44 & 11.3.45.
For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 18 of NEN 6770.
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see
description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN 6770.
1. Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3-48
2. Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.49
3. Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-50
4. Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-51
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 285 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d,
Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be
used for α1, α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above equations
with ‘y’.
In general, this section deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear for class 3 and
class 4 sections.
Check for class 3 sections: For class 3 sections use the method in section 11.3 NEN 6770. For
class 3 sections the methods and equations discussed above can be used with the ‘plastic
section modulus’ being substituted with the ‘elastic modulus’.
Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the effective
section properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771. Working out the effective
section properties for slender sections has already been done in STAAD.Pro.
For I- section profiles and tubular sections, the following cases are checked:
Vz;s;d /Vz;u;d ≤ 1
289 — STAAD.Pro
Where
Where
MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the effective
section. = ( fy·W,eff)
2. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d ≤1 check equation 11.2-13 (given below):
M y ;s ;d
≤1
2
2Vz;s ;d
M N ;y ;f ;u ;d + M N ;y ;u ;d − M N ;y ;f ;u ;d1 − − 1
Vz;u ;d
This clause in NEN 6771 determines the relative torsional slenderness and is given as:
N c ;u ;d
λ θ, re =
FE ;θ
Where:
Nc;u;d = A·fy;d
A = area of section
This clause works out the relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness for compression
members. The relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness is given as:
N c ;u ;d
λ tk , re =
FE ;tk
Nc;u;d = A·fy;d
A = area of section
f = yield stress
y;d
F is the Euler torsional buckling strength
E;tk
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. The effective
length factors may be used to accommodate this requirement.
This clause gives the equations to evaluate the effective lengths for various support
conditions. STAAD.Pro uses the effective length factor ‘K’ which allows the user to set/modify
the effective lengths for a member.
This clause gives methods to evaluate the buckling length of lattice sections. We do not deal
with latticed section in the current version of STAAD.Pro. In any case the buckling length
can be adjusted using the ‘K’ factor.
This clause again deals with working out the effective lengths of prismatic and non-prismatic
rods. Again, the ‘K’ factor in the current implementation of STAAD.Pro is adequate to cater
for adjusting the effective lengths as necessary.
IPE, HEA, HEB & HEM sections and pipe sections do not need to be checked for torsional
instability.
If torsional checks need to be performed, they should be done according to 12.1.2 of NEN 6771.
291 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6771)
This clause gives the condition to check for torsion instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d
≤1
ω θN c ;u ;d
Where:
Doubly symmetric sections need not be checked for torsional flexural instability. However, for
I sections that have rigid supports that is not along the axis of the section and any other
sections will need to be checked as per clause 12.1.3 of NEN 6771.
This clause gives the condition to check for torsional flexural instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d
≤1
ωt ;k N c ;u ;d
Where:
The D-NA states that the values for the imperfection factor, αLT, to be used in equation 6.56 of
EC-3 are to be obtained from sTable 6.3 of EC-3. These are the values used by STAAD.Pro.
kc is a correction factor for moment distribution determined from Table 6.6. This
value can be specified or calculated by the program using the KC parameter. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
The Dutch NA also requires additional checks as per clause 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770.
The checks given in this clause deals with additional checks for columns that form part of a
buttressed or non-butressed framework. The program uses the ESTIFF parameter with two
different values to identify the framework type:
Table 7D.1-Framework parameter ESTIFF values for the
Dutch NA
ESTIFF
Description
value
293 — STAAD.Pro
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 120
Where:
Where:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 100
Where:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the
corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK National Annex
(hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the UK National Annex:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic
LT
Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a particular
method to calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI
cr cr
documents:
This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly symmetric
sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in
the proposed implementation.
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1 2
below:
297 — STAAD.Pro
This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
However, for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI provides graphs to
evaluate the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however, provide a set of equations for these
graphs. However the “end moments and transverse loading” condition cannot be currently
specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for
the CMM parameter viz.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not provide equations
to evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will have to use the new ‘C1’ & ‘C2’
parameters to input the required values for C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values
of 7 or 8 for the CMM parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been
specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains the values of C1
and C2 from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the
method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up
section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. In any case,
the actual LTB capacity will still be worked out as per BS 5950-1 as in the current EC3
implementation.
299 — STAAD.Pro
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2 3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will determine the
values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin
ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end
moments and transverse loading” condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3
parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As
described in section (i) above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters along with CMM
values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using
the CMN parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design
input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on
plan and which have no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end
fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the
method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) the
proposed implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
l For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of BS
EN 1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling curves to be used in this
clause as given below:
Table 7D.1-Buckling curves to use with BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
Cross Section Limits Buckling
Curve
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for
301 — STAAD.Pro
these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per
clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be
replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases
dealt with by the table in the UK NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves
from the UK National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA,
the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate χLT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χLT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the UK
National Annex uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will
only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section
has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in
design input).
The UK-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as below:
Kc = 1 / √C1, where C1 is to be obtained from the NCCI documents given in section 4.2 of this
document. The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table
3.1 as shown below. This proposed implementation will allow for the reduction factor based
on the UK-NA.
303 — STAAD.Pro
These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all other values of
CMN (ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a custom
value of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The user can also get
the program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting the value of the ‘KC’
parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C1
corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn
calculate ‘kc’ as given in the NA. To evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents
mentioned in section 4.2 of this document.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using Annex B
with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA). The UK NA requires
additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of λ and X to be used
in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (λy
in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken as the values from the
highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness (λy), torsional
slenderness (λ ) and torsional-flexural slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of
T TF
BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the
critical non-dimensional slenderness as:
Where:
N = min (N ,N ).
cr CrT crTF
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF. Hence this
implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU:
Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” to calculate these. See
section 4.9 below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and
hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section or a
hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the
purposes of this clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are NOT I, H, SHS,
RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = 2 GI t +
io I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
(
2
2 iy +iz
2
) io
2
305 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the French National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B – Modification factor ‘kfl’
STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is
ignored for the French National Annex.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the French-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades and values from the table given in the National Annex (i.e., -
Table 3.1 NF). Table 3.1 NF is similar to table 3.1 in EC3, apart from the f values for S 355 and
u
S355 W grade steel.
Table 7D.2-Material strengths specified for use with the NF-NA
Nominal thickness, t, of the element
(mm)
40 mm < t <= 80
Standard and grade of t 40 mm
mm
steel
f f f
y u y f
(N/mm (N/mm (N/mm u
2) 2) 2) (N/mm2)
40 mm < t <= 80
Standard and grade of t 40 mm
mm
steel
f f f
y u y f
(N/mm (N/mm (N/mm u
2) 2) 2) (N/mm2)
EN 10025- S 460
460 570 440 550
6 Q/QL/QL 1
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is present in
Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, the program uses the values from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005.
The appropriate yield strength (f ) used is shown in the design output file.
y
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the French National Annex:
307 — STAAD.Pro
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the “Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment”, M . The French NA gives a method to evaluate M in its “Annex MCR”.
cr cr
This implementation will make use of this method to evaluate Mcr. Annex MCR however deals
with the calculation of Mcr for doubly symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will
use this method only for doubly symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are
symmetric about the minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method
from the NCCI document SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type of
section that is not dealt with by the Annex, this implementation will use the method and
tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Annex MCR
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections
cr
only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in this
implementation.
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The
1 2
NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the
1 2
Annex. Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and
the value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2
1
of the National Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C as:
1
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA. Hence this
implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end moment ration (ψ) is exactly
equal to the values of ψ in the table. For all other cases this implementation will calculate the
value of C1 from equation (6) in the Annex.
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the loading and end
conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2
1 2
parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing CMM parameter
values in STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be currently specified in the
design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
The load to moment ratio (μ) will then be used in the calculations will then be used to
calculate C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex MCR in the NA for
details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter ‘MU’ to be specified when using
CMM = 7 or 8. The load to moment ratio (μ) to be used in the calculations is to be input
using the new ‘MU’ parameter. This implementation will require that for the French National
Annex if CMM = 7 or 8 has been specified, the user should also either specify a value for ‘MU’
or input the values for C1 and C2 using the ‘C1’ and/or ‘C2’ parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the context of the
French NA.
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the
method in this NCCI.
309 — STAAD.Pro
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-
Sections.
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2 3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3.
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse
loading” condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the
member( k = kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above methods will be used only for
members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints. For members
with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back
on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is
negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the
load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a
value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear
center of the section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
b 2
αLT = 0.4 − 0.2 λLT ≥ 0
h
Note: Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of λLT,0 to 0.4, STAAD.Pro limits λLT,0 to a
maximum value of 0.4.
311 — STAAD.Pro
b 2
αLT = 0.5 − 0.25 λLT ≥ 0
h
λLT,0 = 0.2
αLT = 0.76
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NF EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value
of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. You may instruct the program to
calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design
input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate kc from Table 6.6 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005.
This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e., the
value of CMM parameter specified).
For CMM = 7, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end
moment ratio.
For CMM = 8, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the end
moment ratio.
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to members that are
free to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN, this implementation
will ignore ‘f’ and hence will use χ = χ .
LT,mod LT
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case
of mono symmetric sections. This is taken into account based on the method given in the
NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes”. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural
buckling" on page 313
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in Table A.2 of
mi,0
Annex A:
N Ed
Cmi, 0 ≥ 1 −
N cr ,i
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
(
2
2 iy +iz
2
) io
2
313 — STAAD.Pro
7D.3 Finnish National Annex to EC3
Adds values from the Finnish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard SFS-EN
1993-1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes
to the base document.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Finnish-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Finnish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SFS-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
The Finnish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that, apart from the steel grades specified in
Table 3.1 of SFS EN 1993-1-1, the following steel grades can also be used:
l Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN 10149-2
l Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN 10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate
Strength) parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the respective values as given in
SFS-EN 10149-2/3 for the steel grades specified above. The choice of the buckling curve to be
used is based on the value of the SGR parameter specified. The output will include the
appropriate yield strength used for design.
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Finnish National Annex:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic
LT
Critical Buckling Moment’, M . The Finnish National Annex does not specify a particular
cr
method to calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI
cr cr
documents:
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of
1 2
the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in
1 2
the tables below:
315 — STAAD.Pro
Table 7D.3-Values of C for end
1
moment loading (for k=1)
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram
through the CMM parameter.
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for
cr
uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the
elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this
NCCI.
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria.
1 2 3
This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C ,
1 2
and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended
3
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end
moments and transverse loading” condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3
parameters to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating
1 2 3
M .
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore
MU and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these
values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
317 — STAAD.Pro
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used. Hence even
for rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio ≥ 3.1, this implementation will
resort to checks as per clause 6.3.2.2.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate
the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors
to be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and
imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 315 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the
equations in the Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
319 — STAAD.Pro
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 315 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
Where:
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
( 2
2 iy +iz )
2
io
2
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Polish-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Polish National Annex (hereafter referred to as PN-NA) and that are relevant to
the proposed implementation are:
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Polish National Annex:
321 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that
use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment’, M . The Polish National Annex does not specify a particular method to
cr
calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr cr
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of
1 2
the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in
1 2
the tables below:
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram
through the CMM parameter.
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for
cr
uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the
elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this
NCCI.
323 — STAAD.Pro
2
(k x L )2GI T
kx
2 2
M cr = C1
π EI s
k
Iw
+ + (C 2z e − C3z 1) − C2z e − C 3z 1
(k x L )2 w Is 2
π EI x
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria.
1 2 3
This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C ,
1 2
and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended
3
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end
moments and transverse loading” condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters
to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these
values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value
of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is
negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the
load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear
center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a
value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear
center of the section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate
the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT
325 — STAAD.Pro
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to
be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection
factors for LTB checks" on page 315 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the
Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional
cr
slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 315 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
kc = √(CmLT)
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor from table B.3 of PN-EN 1993-1-1.
mLT
C is evaluated based on the end conditions of the member and the shape of
mLT
the bending moment diagram. However, if the KC parameter has been used, then
the program will use the specified value.
The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will provide
for these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as optional checks, by
default, the program will not perform these checks. However, the user can invoke these
checks by using the PLG parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 261
If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be performed as per
Cl. NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:
n/ χ and + C m /χ + C mz m with ≤ 1- Δ (I = y or z)
my y LT 0
Where:
n = N /N
Ed Rd
m = max M (+ Δ M )/M ; m = max M (+ Δ M )/M
y y,Ed y, Ed y, Rd z ,Z Ed , Ed Z Rd,
χ and –buckling factor,
χ - LTB factor
LT
C - moment factor from table B 3 of PN EN 1993-1-1,
m
Δ -correction factor (estimation of maximum reduction) and will be
0
worked out as:
If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios will be
taken as being critical for Cl 6.3.3:
6.3.3: Eqn6.61
6.3.3: Eqn6.62
NA.20(2) and
NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 (or not specified at all), the program will ignore the last two
checks in the list above.
327 — STAAD.Pro
7D.4.8 Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and
torsional-flexural buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. PN EN 1993-1-
T
1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer
cr,T,F cr,T
6.3.14 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005).
The NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore
cr,TF cr,T
these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Polish NA.
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
( 2
2 iy +iz )
2
io
2
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Singaporean-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Singaporean National Annex (hereafter referred to as SS-NA) and that are relevant
to the proposed implementation are:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’, STAAD.Pro will
ignore the specified value and use the default values as given above.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic
LT
Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The Singaporean National Annex does not specify a
particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on the
following NCCI documents:
This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly symmetric
sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The
equation to evaluate Mcr is given in the NCCI as:
2
k Iw +
2 2
π EI (kL ) GI t 2
M cr = C1 + (C 2Zg) − C 2Zg
(kL ) 2 k w I π 2EI
329 — STAAD.Pro
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases as given in the tables
below:
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical
moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be evaluated using the method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-
Sections.
π EI z
2
(k x L )2GI T
kx
2 2
+ (C2zg − C 3z 1) − C2zg − C 3z 1
Iw
M cr = C1 k +
(k x L )2 w I π 2EI z
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and
C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse
loading” condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
331 — STAAD.Pro
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The
Singaporean-NA provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1)
LT0
as follows:
Note: This table does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded
doubly symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric
sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the method
specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Singaporean Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl.
6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will
LT
consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Singaporean National Annex states that Table 6.5 in SS EN 1993-1-1:2005
should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence
for all cases dealt with by the table in the Singaporean NA, this implementation will choose
the buckling curves from the Singaporean National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with
by the table in the Singaporean NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of SS
EN 1993-1-1:2005.
For the following cross sections, the program will use the Table in the Singaporean NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the SS EN has been specified):
333 — STAAD.Pro
l Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections
l Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS)
l Angle Sections
l Any other rolled section
l Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate χ
LT
l Welded I & H Sections with h/b ≥ 3.1.
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional
cr
slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See section above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter
values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has
been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design
input).
The Singaporean-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as
below:
Kc = 1 / √C1
Where:
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value
c
of K by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the
c
design input is set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will
cause the program to evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the
1
Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C ,
c 1
the program will use the NCCI documents as previously described.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the Singaporean NA gives the option of using
Annex B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the Singaporean NA).
The Singaporean NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum
allowable values of λ and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the Singaporean NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the
weak axis (λy in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken as the
values from the highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness
(λy), torsional slenderness (λT) and torsional-flexural slenderness (λTF) as given in Clauses
6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the
program will calculate the critical non-dimensional slenderness as:
Note: The Singaporean National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in
specific and hence this implementation will use the method used in the current
EC3 implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current
implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed
335 — STAAD.Pro
implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections
to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the Singaporean NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section
or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the
purposes of this clause”. Hence, for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS,
RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
(2
2 iy +iz
2
) io
2
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the
critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the NBN-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Belgian National Annex (hereafter referred to as NBN-NA) and that are relevant
to the proposed implementation are:
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Belgian National Annex:
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The NBN-NA gives a method to calculate M in Annex D, which is
cr cr
used by STAAD.Pro. Annex D, however, only deals with the calculation of M for doubly
cr
symmetric sections and mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the minor axis
(i.e, Tee sections). For any other type of section that is not dealt with by Annex D, STAAD.Pro
uses the method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992:
337 — STAAD.Pro
Doubly symmetric sections
Annex D of NBN-NA provides equation used to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric
cr
sections:
2
k I
2 2
π EI (kL ) GI t 2
M cr = C1 k Iw + + (C 2Zg) − C 2Zg
w
2
(kL ) π 2EI
C & C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The Annex
1 2
provides values for C & C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex.
1 2
Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the
value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of
1
the National Annex however gives a formula to calculate C as:
1
C1 = 1.77 - 1.04ψ + 0.27ψ2 ≤ 2.60
The value of C2 is determined based on the Table 2 of the Annex, based on the loading and
end conditions as specified using the CMM parameter.
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
Annex D of NBN-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for
cr
uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections is evaluated using the method in
this Annex.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric
built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-
Sections.
π EI z
2
(k x L )2GI T
kx
2
2
+ (C2zg − C 3z 1) − C2zg − C 3z 1
Iw
M cr = C1 k +
(k x L )2 w I π 2EI z
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2 3
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
339 — STAAD.Pro
End Moments and Bend- k Value of
z
Support Conditions ing coefficients
mome-
C C
nt 1 3
dia- ψ ψ
gram f f
≤0 >0
341 — STAAD.Pro
End Moments and Bend- k Value of
z
Support Conditions ing coefficients
mome-
C C
nt 1 3
dia- ψ ψ
gram f f
≤0 >0
343 — STAAD.Pro
End Moments and Bend- k Value of
z
Support Conditions ing coefficients
mome-
C C
nt 1 3
dia- ψ ψ
gram f f
≤0 >0
ψ = -1 1.- 2.6- -ψ -ψ
f f
0 0
C C C
1 2 3
1- 1.- 0- 0.-
.- 1- .- 52-
0 2 4- 5
5
0- 0- 0- 0.-
.- .- .3- 47-
5 9- 6 8
7
1- 1.- 0- 0.-
.- 3- .5- 41-
0 5 9 1
0- 1.- 0- 0.-
.- 0- .- 33-
5 5 4- 8
8
1- 1.- 0- 0.-
.- 0- .- 56-
0 4 4- 2
2
0- 0- 0- 0.-
.- .- .3- 53-
5 9- 1 9
5
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2, and
C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
uniformly distributed load (UDL) along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the
“end moments and transverse loading” condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’
and ‘C3’ parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating
Mcr.
345 — STAAD.Pro
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value
of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it
acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG =
0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
1. If M is determined by considering the properties of the gross cross section and the
cr
lateral restraints, the following values are used:
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the Belgian Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3
to evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Belgian National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors
to be used for various section types. (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or
equivalent welded section" on page 346 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in
the NBN-NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs
mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section" on
page 346 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this
implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
You can override the default behavior and specify the clause that is to be used for LTB checks.
This can be specified using the MTH design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 261).
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of NBN-EN 1993-1-
1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the
section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0
in design input).
347 — STAAD.Pro
functionality to work out the correction factor ‘kc’ to be used in the modification factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a custom value
of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The user can also get the
program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting the value of the ‘KC’ parameter
in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to work out ‘kc’ from table 6.6 of NBN
EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the
member (i.e the value of CMM parameter specified).
l For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on
the end moment ratio.
l For CMM = 8 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on
the end moment ratio.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case
of mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need to be taken into account
based on the method given in the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for
torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes”. See section below for details.
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in table A.2 of Annex
mi,0
A:
N Ed
Cmi, 0 ≥ 1 −
N cr ,i
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
( 2
2 iy +iz )
2
io
2
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the
critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the MS-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt
with in the Malaysian National Annex (hereafter referred to as MS-NA) and that are relevant
to the proposed implementation are:
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Malaysian National Annex:
349 — STAAD.Pro
l Resistance of cross sections to tension, γ = 1.1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the MS-NA (NA 9
is specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 261
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The MS-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr.
cr
Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
SN003a-EN-EU NCCI: Elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling provides equation
used to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections:
cr
2
π EI k 2 I w 2
(kL ) GI t 2
M cr = C1 + + (C 2Zg) − C 2Zg
(kL ) 2 k w I S 2
π EI S
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1
1 2
and Table 3.2.
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2
1 2
parameters, respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
Annex D of MS-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for
cr
uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
π EI z
2
(k x L )2GI T
kx
2
2
+ (C2zg − C 3z 1) − C2zg − C 3z 1
Iw
M cr = C1 k +
(k x L )2 w I 2
π EI z
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The
1 2 3
program considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the
1 2 3
CMM parameter.
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
uniformly distributed load (UDL) along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the
“end moments and transverse loading” condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to
input the required values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be
manually specified.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is
free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of
cr
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section.
The value of z is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative
g
if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts
towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center.
351 — STAAD.Pro
The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of
ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term z in the equation will have a value of zero.
g
1. For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3
LT
(and the MS NA) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl.
LT
6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the MS NA states that Table 6.5 in MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with
the table given in the NA (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded
section" on page 352). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the MS NA, this
implementation will choose the buckling curves from the MS NA. For any case that is not
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the MS NA for
choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the MS NA has been specified):
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
evaluate χ
LT
l Welded I & H Sections with h/b ≥ 3.1.
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3,
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as described in "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and
imperfection factors for LTB checks". Since the MS NA uses the NCCI documents
mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will only consider end restraint
conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0. For all other cases of the CMN parameter
values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-
1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H
Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section
has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in
design input).
The program does not calculate the kc factor and conservatively uses a reduction factor equal
to 1. The proposed implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the MS NA.
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., CMN = 1.0). Hence for all other values
of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5), the program uses the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
353 — STAAD.Pro
You can also manually specify a value for kc by setting the design parameter, KC, to the desired
value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting
the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate
a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member
1
and in turn calculate k as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI
c 1
documents (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB
checks" on page 350).
Note that for the MS NA, the program will attempt to evaluate k by default using the
c
equation in NA,
kc = 1 / C1
However, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the MS NA gives the option of using Annex B
with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the MS NA). The MS NA requires
additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of λ and X to be used
in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the MS NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (λ
y
in STAAD.Pro) and the corresponding reduction factor χ should be taken as the values from
y
the highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness (λ ), torsional
y
slenderness (λ ) and torsional-flexural slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of
T TF
MS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the
critical non-dimensional slenderness as:
where
A ⋅fy
λT =
N cr
The MS NA or EC3 does not, however, specify a method to evaluate N or N . Hence, the
crT crTF
program uses the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load
Note: The MS NA or EC3 does not deal with angle sections specifically and therefore
STAAD.Pro uses the method described in the EC3 implementation to deal with
slenderness of angle sections. This is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950.
Clause NA 3.2 of the MS NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section or a
hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the
purposes of this clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS,
RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
1 π EI w
2
Ncr, T = GI t +
i o2 I T2
Where:
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong
y z
axis) respectively.
i o2 2 i y2 + i z2
Ncr, TF = Ncr, y + Ncr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T
(2
2 iy +iz
2
) io
2
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections when evaluating the
critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
355 — STAAD.Pro
7E. Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing timber design based on the European code EC5 Part 1-1
Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures - Part 1.1: General-Common rules and rules for
buildings.
Design of members per EC5 Part 1-1 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Design per EC5 is limited to the prismatic, rectangular shapes only. There is no Eurocode-
specific timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined shapes for analysis or for
design. The feature of member selection is thus not applicable to this code.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design.
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which
they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures
under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed
are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for
each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of EC 5. A
detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions
is available in the specification document.
EC5, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the
longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the
orthogonal right hand rule.
STAAD EC5
B. γ – Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004.
m
For “Solid Timber”, the value of γ = 1.3 is incorporated in the program.
m
C. Kh – Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the
reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be
increased by the factor Kh.
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in
bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor
Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic
timber density ρ ≤ 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width
k
(maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is
incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of
Kh for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veneer lumber respectively.
D. KC90 – Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and
degree of compressive deformation.
357 — STAAD.Pro
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking.
For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in
STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this
regard.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than
equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined
by STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following characteristic strength values are
required to compute the other related characteristic values.
i. Bending Strength – f
m,k
ii. Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending – E
0, mean
iii. Density - ρ
k
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ
with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values
obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the
values of Table-1 are based on these equations.
359 — STAAD.Pro
7E.2.1 Design values of Characteristic Strength
As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as:
Xd = K mod·(Xk /γm)
Where:
If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain
alignment, the following formula should be checked:
If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain
alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.3 of EC-5 2004:
The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated per Equations 6.21 and 6.22 of EC-5
2004.
361 — STAAD.Pro
If both λ and λ are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be
rel,z rel,y
satisfied:
In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004 should be
satisfied.
The value of β incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber (i.e., 0.2).
c
B. Beam Stability check
If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the stresses should
satisfy Equation 6.33 of EC-5 2004:
Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive force exists,
the stresses should satisfy Equation 6.35 of EC-5 2004 (ref. to Equations 6.32 and 6.34 of
the same):
Where:
Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the
parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new
setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
363 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
365 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
l Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 =
C16, 3 = C18, 4 = C20, 5
= C22, 6 = C24, 7 = C27,
8 = C30, 9 = C35, 10 =
C40, 11 = C45, 12 = C50.
l Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14
= D35, 15 = D40, 16 =
D50, 17 = D60, 18 =
D70.
Material properties:
Solution
Fx = 50.000 kN
Slenderness ratios:
λz = (1000/57) = 17.54
λy = (1000/21) = 47.62
367 — STAAD.Pro
λrel,y = λy /π·(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/π(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.809
Where:
Kcz = 1/{Kz + [(Kz)2 - (λrel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008
Kcy = 1/{Ky + [(Kzy )2 - (λrel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression only, so
actual bending stress is zero.
Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46/(1.008·12.92) + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.268
+ 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.266
Sc0d /(Kcy·Fc0d ) + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46 /(0.820·12.92) + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
+ + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Input File
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
==================================================================-
=====
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.327
1
50.00 C 0.00 0.00
0.0000
369 — STAAD.Pro
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00
|
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769
|
| FC = 12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
| fby = 0.000 fbz = 0.000
|
| fc = 3.459
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
Material properties:
Solution
Fx = 5.000 kN
Mz = 2.000 kN·m
My = 1.000 kN·m
Slenderness ratios:
λz = (1000/57) = 17.54
λy = (1000/21) = 47.62
Since, λ is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied [Cl 6.3.2.3]:
rel,y
Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
Where:
Kcz = 1/{Kz + [(Kz)2 - (λrel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008
Kcy = 1/{Ky + [(Kzy )2 - (λrel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820
371 — STAAD.Pro
Combined stress ratio:
Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Input File
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
Output
==================================================================-
=====
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.616
1
5.00 C 1.00 -2.00
0.0000
|---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00
|
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769
|
| FC = 12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
373 — STAAD.Pro
| fby = 5.686 fbz = 4.193
|
| fc = 0.346
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
Design of members per B4 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
1. LA — Least aggressive
2. NA — Aggressive
3. MA — Very aggressive
381 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per B7 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
383 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe
members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
Design of members per BAEL 1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is
through user supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user approximates the
389 — STAAD.Pro
additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before
beginning member design.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300.
11 13 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these
members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them
along with YD and ZD. Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not
provided, the program will calculate values from YD and ZD.
Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup
sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams
with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The
parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table 7A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other
parameters mentioned in Table 7A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
391 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 9A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
Design of members per CM66 requires the STAAD NEurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria, as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other related
parameters. The code checking portion of the program verifies that code requirements for each
selected section are met and also identifies the governing criteria.
The next few sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of "Design Rules
for Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design process, along with its
underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the specification document.
For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial compression
capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used.
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and
4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per
section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 7B.1) must be used to specify
the unsupported length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note
that this length is also referred to as twisting length.
The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for conventional
design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter
values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
395 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal
angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
397 — STAAD.Pro
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which
governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The
following is a detailed description of printed items:
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual
components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the
ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used
selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to
perform a design are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle,
channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of
prismatic properties.
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of
this section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be
obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
10 15 TA ST IPE140
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180
9B.8.2 HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200
23 56 TA ST IPN380
9B.8.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120
9B.8.5 U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
399 — STAAD.Pro
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
11 TA D UAP150
17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel UAP150 with no
spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length
units between the channels.
9B.8.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm.
This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle)
should be used instead of ST.
17 21 TA RA L25X25X4
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the
section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.
33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L80X40X6
43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75
64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7
66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of
2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall
thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For
example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE
sections specified in this way.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6
3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64
and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm.
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters
of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only
code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
9B.8.11 Example
401 — STAAD.Pro
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
12 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
14 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
Design of members per DIN 1045 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045 17.4.3/17.4.4 which is
used as the basis for commonly used design charts considering e/d and sk/d for conditions
where the slenderness moment exceeds 70. This method has been adopted in the column
design in STAAD per the DIN code.
The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis. Secondary
moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of
a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic
stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated. To perform this type of
analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file.
The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading
must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact
that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a
primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note
that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user.
STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is designed for the total
moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can
be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
407 — STAAD.Pro
"balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting
on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed
hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and rectangular
columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides equally. That means the
total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative
results in some cases. The TRACK parameter may be used to obtain the design details in various
levels of detail.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The
following parameters are those applicable to slab design:
FYMAIN
Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
FC
Concrete grade
CLEAR
Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
SRA
Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required transverse
reinforcement relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement for the
calculation of BAUMANN design forces.
The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10 mm in the longitudinal direction and 8
mm in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the slab exterior face.
409 — STAAD.Pro
parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as
Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
411 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Design of members per DIN 18800 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
10B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. It is recommended that you use the following steps in
performing the steel design:
10B.2 AnalysisMethodology
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular
stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed
and the results combined with static analysis results.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be
obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140
10B.4.2 HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
10B.4.3 I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the
designation.
10B.4.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
415 — STAAD.Pro
10B.4.5 U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former
(U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of
260mm.
11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260
11 TA D U180
27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (INDICATES 2 CHANNELS BACK-TO-BACK SPACED AT
0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
10B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is
specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm.
The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified
in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse
angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5
14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters
of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code
checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall thickness of
3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness)
instead of by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length
units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
10B.4.11 Example
417 — STAAD.Pro
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
12 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
419 — STAAD.Pro
Table 10B.1-German Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0. Rolled
1. Built-up
0. St 37-2
1. St 52-3
2. St E 355
421 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along
the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are
specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member
start and end forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE GERMAN
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
423 — STAAD.Pro
Section 11
Indian Codes
Design of members per IS 456 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm
depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the
above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall
depth and 100 mm flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the
section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Column Design:
427 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
429 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0. output consists of
reinforcement details at START,
MIDDLE, and END.
1. critical moments are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. required steel for intermediate
sections defined by NSECTION
are printed in addition to
TRACK 1.0 output.
Column Design:
11A.3.1 Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the
BAR COMBINATION command. Refer to Section 9A.8 for details.
b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to find
whether it is a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l and l , which STAAD calculates
ex ey
as:
l l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of
ex
the member)
l l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of
ey
the member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension of the
column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension of the
column.
c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column to find
minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of
a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition occurs, the RENSH
parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The shear
strength will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input should be the
following:
Steps:
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length
of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the
431 — STAAD.Pro
member
2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of
the member 2, length measured from the start of the member
3. ENSH –L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length
of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the
member
4. ENSH –(X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of
the member 3, length measured from the end of the member
5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the
members 2 and 3.
6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to length X
from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing
accordingly.
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity.
However for any section shear stress cannot exceed τc, max. Hence enhanced shear
strength is limited to a maximum value of τc, max.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis,
use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The P-Delta analysis will
accommodate all requirements of the second- order analysis described by IS:456, except for the
effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because
experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural
configuration.
sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been
implemented in STAAD.Pro. They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are
specified.
Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may be used for
the design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments
(i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta
analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined prior to analysis using
the REPEAT LOAD command.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load, etc.) as STAAD
does not factor the loads automatically.
433 — STAAD.Pro
choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which
the final detail drawing can be prepared.
As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the effective
depth) close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum value of τ .
cmax
435 — STAAD.Pro
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
==================================================================-
==========
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
437 — STAAD.Pro
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.0-
6400.0 |
| mm | mm |
mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
TOP | 2-16í | 2-16í | 2-
16í |
| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 |
0.00 |
Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 |
402.29 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 |
752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
BOTTOM | 4-16í | 2-16í + 2-25í | 4-
16í |
| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 |
632.82 |
Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 |
804.57 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 |
752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
===================================================================-
=========
The design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane & out-of-plane bending, and out-of-plane
shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAAD’s Surface elements (Refer to Section 5.13.3 of
the Technical Reference Manual). The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat
the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to
the analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall
rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required
information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for the specified
number of sections given in the SURFACE DIVISION command (default value is 10) command.
The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required
horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge
reinforcing and the link required for out-of-plane shear.
Refer to Section 5.55 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on shear wall
design.
CODE INDIAN
shearwall-parameters
END
The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
439 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance,
the line 2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5.
As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12
command, there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all
13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are
not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the
finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and
SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and
END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design.
For Indian code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is
followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or
shear wall components.
The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective height is the
height of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is taken as
441 — STAAD.Pro
30.
Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce in-plane
bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1, in-plane bending
may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is always under compression
due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads. Otherwise, the section is checked for
combined vertical load and in-plane moment as column with axial load and uni-axial
bending. For this purpose, the depth is taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is
the thickness of the wall. The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall.
The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal
length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a). Maximum
4% reinforcement is allowed.
By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the horizontal
sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at critical section as per
clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed.
The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear stress is
calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum allowable shear stress
as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of concrete is calculated as per clause no.
32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements
are as per clause no. 32.5.
Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also subjected to out-
of-plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The part of the wall which is not
having edge reinforcements (i.e., a zone of depth 0.6 x Length of the wall), is designed again as
column under axial load (i.e., vertical load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum
reinforcements and maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is checked against
out-of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for this purpose.
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear stresses are
calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses are as per table 20. For
shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per
section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Similarly, for shear force in the horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is
calculated considering horizontal reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear
reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
11A.8.3 Example
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the
wall.
…
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
…
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
…
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185E+007
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1E-005
…
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE INDIAN
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 415
TWO 1
443 — STAAD.Pro
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the
presence of openings, the wall may be comprise of different wall panels of varying types.
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter
nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates,
and meshing divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
Where:
Note: If the sd1, … , sdj or the od1, … , odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding
division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the
SET DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the
surface where output is requested. The output is provided for sections
located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions
= 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of
the edge).
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall.
The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, … ,si
Where:
a — distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the full
cross-section of the wall,
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away
from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Where:
445 — STAAD.Pro
j = ordinal panel number,
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code IS 456.
General syntax of the design command is as follows:
(…)
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of
the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or
SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design of members per IS 1320 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
449 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1.0 = no printout of
sectional force and
critical load for
combined member in the
output.
a positive value(say x ) =
shear strength will be
enhanced up to a
distance x from the start
of the member. This is
used only when a span of
a beam is subdivided into
two or more parts. (Refer
note after Table 8A.1 )
451 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
453 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
ignored at start node of
beam. This implies no
support exists at start
node.
-1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
considered at start node
of beam. . This implies
support exists at start
node.
2.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
ignored at end node of
beam. This implies no
support exists at end
node.
-2.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
considered at end node
of beam. . This implies
support exists at end
node. **
1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
ignored at both ends of
beam. This implies no
support exist at either
end of the member.
-1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
considered at both ends
of beam. This implies
support exist at both
ends of the member.**
455 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Column Design:
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed.
2.0 = a schematic
interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction
values are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A1.6 for details.
457 — STAAD.Pro
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are
ignored for members forming physical member.
1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this
parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine
members to form one continuous beam spanning over more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments
will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this
calculation will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the
beam. Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined
member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active
load cases during design.
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span
between two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into several
members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density, and
beta angle)
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined
members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available
when all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and
shear.
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical
member has been formed.
11B.3.1 Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
…
MEMBER INCIDENCES
…
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
…
CONSTANTS
…
SUPPORTS
…
DEFINE 1893 LOAD
ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1
SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT
…
LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR
1893 LOAD X 1
LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR
1893 LOAD Z 1
LOAD 3 DL
MEMBER LOAD
…… UNI GY -5
LOAD 4 LL
MEMBER LOAD
……. UNI GY -3
LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL)
3 1.5 4 1.5
LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
459 — STAAD.Pro
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
PDELTA ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 5 TO 9
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE IS13920
UNIT MMS NEWTON
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 20 ALL
MINMAIN 12 ALL
MAXMAIN 25 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
*** UNFACTORED GRAVITY LOAD ON MEMBERS 110 TO 112 IS 8 T/M (DL+LL)
I.E., 78.46 NEW/MM
EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112
** MEMBERS TO BE COMBINED INTO ONE PHYSICAL MEMBER
COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
*** PLASTIC MOMENT CONSIDERED
PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112
DESIGN COLUMN …
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FINISH
For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be less than 200
mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to depth ratio of more than
0.3 (Clause 6.1.2).
The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1) for all active
load cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be performed.
2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.1b)
ρmin = 0.24√fck/fy
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.2)
ρmax = 0.025
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at
that face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be
equal to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of
either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments.
Procedure is same as that of IS 456.
The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS-
13920:
The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall not exceed
a. d/4
The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456 consideration is
provided.
461 — STAAD.Pro
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)|
SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY
MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------
------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61
0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF
IS-13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 6400.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF
IS-13920
NOTE :
MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL
PROVIDED.
IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF
STEEL
REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE
DESIGN
SHEAR FORCE.
---------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
STAAD SPACE --
PAGE NO. 7
0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )|
8í @ 100 mm
533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )|
8í @ 180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )|
8í @ 100 mm
---------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
l Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
463 — STAAD.Pro
l The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For
columns having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column
shall not be less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
l The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column,
except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3)
l Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each joint face,
o
towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur.
The length l shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the
o
section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm.
(Clause 7.4.1)
l The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed ¼ of
minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100
mm. (Clause 7.4.6)
l The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for
minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops,
to be used as special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
Along Z Along Y
DESIGN SHEAR FORCES
: 43.31
76.08
REQD. STEEL AREA : 3313.56 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 12 - 20 dia.
(2.69%, 3769.91 Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia.
rectangular ties @ 85 mm c/c
over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards
midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920.
TIE REINFORCEMENT
: Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 175 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 :
178.71 Muy1 : 150.75
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
==================================================================-
==========
********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN
RESULTS********************
465 — STAAD.Pro
ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
===================================================================-
=========
Bar diameter = 12 mm
Length, L = 4,000 mm
A = 339.29 mm 2
st_Top_A
A = 226.19 mm 2
st_Bot_A
A = 226.19 mm 2
st_Top_B
A = 339.29 mm 2
st_Bot_B
Steps
467 — STAAD.Pro
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 54003057.45 N
Resistance of End A Mu,
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
bs =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_ = 36768130.05 N
Resistance of End A Mob Top_B* fy / b * d * fck)
=
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam
plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.2 - Sway to right
419 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 3000 mm
Ast_Top_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 226.19 sq. mm
469 — STAAD.Pro
Hogging 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * = 32940364.5 N
Moment Of
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Resistance of
End A Mu,ah =
Sagging 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 32940364.5 N
Moment Of
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
Resistance of
End A Mu,bs =
Hogging 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy / b * = 63326721.3 N
Moment Of d * fck)
Resistance of
End A Mu,bh =
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam
plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.4 - Sway to right
Sway to left
Design of members per IS 800 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Steel design per the limit state method in IS 800 is also available in the Steel
Design mode in the Graphical User Interface.
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 11C.13 describes the
specification of steel sections.
This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by
IS:800 and implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during
the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described below.
The permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the sections
at
shall not exceed
σat = 0.6·fy
Where:
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall
not exceed 0.6·f nor the permissible stress σ calculated based on the following equation (per
y ac
Clause: 5.1.1):
Where:
Where:
473 — STAAD.Pro
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z
axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective
section shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The
maximum permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula:
(Clause: 6.2.2)
fcbf y
σ bc = 0.66 1/n
(f ) + f n
cb
n
y ()
Clause 6.2.3
Where:
fcb = k 1X + k 2Y 2
c
c1
Where:
2
1 π
X = Y 1+
20 ry D
in MPa
5
26.5(10)
Y= 2
(1 / ry)
k = a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges
1
between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on ψ, the ratio of the
total area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the
corresponding area at the point of greatest bending moment between such
points of restraint.
T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the area of
horizontal portion of flange divided by width.
c ,c = respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section neutral
1 2
axis to the extreme fibres.
For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required to be
satisfied.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
475 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
(36.25 KSI)
477 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Default Value Description
11C.4.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints
and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members will be equal to the
total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to
model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should
be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical
condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location (distance from the
start) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
479 — STAAD.Pro
Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will
be limited to sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on
members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table
11C.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member
depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest
section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member
with a section being selected from each one.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
MEMBER
the member number for which the design is performed
TABLE
the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or
has been selected.
RESULT
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the IS:800 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number which governs the design.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension
(FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress
(FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all members parameter code
values are as shown in the following example.
********************************************
|---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------|
| Y
PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN
CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== --
---------- |
|MEMBER 7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | AX
= 85.0 |
| * | ST ISWB400 | | --Z AY
= 34.4 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ
= 34.7 |
| IS-800 * =============================== ===|=== SY
= 138.8 |
| * SZ
= 1171.3 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| RY
= 4.0 |
|************* RZ
= 16.6 |
|
|
| 112.1( KN-METR)
|
|PARAMETER |L1
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM | IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- + --
-----------|
481 — STAAD.Pro
| KL/R-Y= 74.2 | FA
= 150.0 |
| KL/R-Z= 18.1 + fa
= 1.0 |
| UNL = 3000.0 | FCZ
= 139.9 |
| C = 400.0 + FTZ
= 165.0 |
| CMY = 0.60 | FCY
= 165.0 |
| CMZ = 0.40 + FTY
= 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 | L3 fbz
= 95.7 |
| NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby
= 0.0 |
| DFF = 0.0 90.5 FV
= 100.0 |
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv
= 17.1 |
| (WITH LOAD NO.)
|
|
|
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
|
| -------------------------
|
|
|
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y
MOMENT-Z |
|
|
| VALUE -23.9 60.6 0.0 0.0
112.1 |
| LOCATION 0.0 3.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0
1 |
|
|
|******************************************************************-
********|
|*
*|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
|*****************************************************************-
*********|
Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available
in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user
interface.
20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an ‘A” on the
end (e.g., ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125
12 TA ST ISLC300
483 — STAAD.Pro
11C.12.3 Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter
D in front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D ISJC125, D ISMC75, etc.).
21 22 24 TA D ISLC225
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The
standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this manual. The standard
angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis
specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other
programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by
accepting the command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6
1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100
67 68 TA ST ISST250
10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside diameters of
the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is
used.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and
not by any table designations.
485 — STAAD.Pro
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
A 150X150X18
B 200X100X15
C 200X150X18
E 200X200X18
A. Joist Designation
IW450 = ISWB450
350 = ISMC350
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more
efficient.
a. Lacing
b. Batten
Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by lacing or by
batten plates having riveted or welded connection.
Table 11C.3 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design. These
parameters will have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters defined in
Table 11C.1.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
487 — STAAD.Pro
Table 11C.3-Parameters used in Indian Lacing or Batten steel member
design.
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
489 — STAAD.Pro
11D. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 802
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 802 1995 Use of
Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers - Code of Practice.
Design of members per IS 802 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:802 and
implemented in STAAD.
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described below.
The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various members,
multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum guaranteed yield
stress of the material.
Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the sections
at
shall not exceed
σat = Fy
Where:
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the appropriate factor of
safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae described below.
Fa = Fy {1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/Cc]2 }
ii. When KL/r > Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = π2 E/(KL/r)2
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = Fy [1.677 - 0.677·(b/t)/(b/t)lim]
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = 65,550/(b/t)
Where:
b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.
491 — STAAD.Pro
11D.3.1 Compression Member
Table 11D.1-Slenderness ratio limits of compression
members
Type of Member Slenderness
Limit
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for
L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of
finding slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
Galvanized Painted
Other members 4 5
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical
condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the
governing forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option calculation steps are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
1. Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is checked against
minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the member is painted or
galvanized.
493 — STAAD.Pro
2. If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the
member is under compression or tension for the load case under consideration.
Depending upon whether the member is under tension or compression the slenderness
ratio of the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against allowable
slenderness ratio.
3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed.
Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and
there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by
the program itself (See "Calculation of Net Section Factor" on page 500). Actual axial
stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less
than 1.0 or user defined value, the member has passed the check.
4. Number of bolts required for the critical load case is calculated.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table
9C.3. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member
depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest
section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member
with a section being selected from each one.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
v1.0
********************************************
|---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------|
| Y
PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN
CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== --
---------- |
|MEMBER 8 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX
= 17.0 |
| * | ST ISA125x95x8 | | | --Z AY
= 6.7 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ
= 5.1 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY
= 38.8 |
| * SZ
= 16.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 1.80 --->| RY
= 4.4 |
|************* RZ
= 2.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- --
-----------|
| L/R-Y = 40.5 BOLT DIA = 12 MM FA
= 188.4 |
| L/R-Z = 87.9 BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN fa
= 80.7 |
| KL/R = 87.9 # BOLT = 6
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 1.0
|
| NSF = 1.0
|
495 — STAAD.Pro
|
|
|******************************************************************-
********|
|*
*|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.428 1
|
| 137.13 C 0.0 0.0 0.00
|
|*
*|
|******************************************************************-
********|
|
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
Using TRACK 9.0 also adds the following set of calculation details:
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
----------------------
CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 8.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------
VALUE OF L/r : 87.94
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 87.94
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.53
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 125.0 - 8.0 - 9.0 : 108.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 13.50
(b/t)cal > (b/t)lim
(b/t)lim (modified) : 378/sqrt(fy) : 23.91
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim (modified) AND KL/r <= Cc
Fcr : (1.677 - (0.677*(b/t)cal/(b/t)lim))*fy : 247.18 MPA
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*Fcr
: 188.41 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 1
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 137131.16 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 137131.16 / 1700.0 : 80.67 MPA
RESULT : PASS
EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO.1 --
PAGE NO. 24
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 12 MM
SHEARING CAP : 24.66 KN
BEARING CAP : 41.86 KN
BOLT CAP : 24.66 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 6
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
497 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
499 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
l For an angle section, it is the ratio of the net effective area, A , to the gross area,
net
where:
Anet = A1 + A2 · K1
Where:
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg – 0.5x thickness
of leg)
b. Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of each angle to the
same side of a gusset plate
Anet = A1 + A2 · K1
Where:
c. Double angles placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a gusset plate
501 — STAAD.Pro
11D.11.1 Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including 120
STAAD TRUSS
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4;
6 2.2 12 2.2; 7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4;
11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2; 13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9
2.4;
16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2; 18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -
1.4 24 1.4;
21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2; 23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9
-2.4;
26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2; 28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4
24 -1.4;
31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2; 33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -
2.4 9 -2.4;
36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2; 38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6;
40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2; 42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2;
44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2; 47 4.2 30 1.2; 48
4.2 27 -1.2;
49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2; 52 -7.2 27 1.2;
53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2; 56 -4.2 30 -1.2;
57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2; 60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61
0 35 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2;
10 11 13;
11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19
20; 18 20 12;
19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26
20 10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34
15 6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42
19 10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25
26; 50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5
25; 58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3;
66 3 24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74
7 28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30;
82 31 33;
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39
40; 90 40 32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29
39; 98 30 40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35;
105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37;
112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13;
119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20;
126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14;
133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19;
140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42;
147 2 41;
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41;
154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42;
161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50;
168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49;
175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47;
182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53;
189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54;
196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54;
203 42 56;
503 — STAAD.Pro
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51;
210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58;
217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58;
224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59;
231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240
15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247
39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41;
254 43 42;
255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD
ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144
155 156 -
159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228
231 232 251 -
252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05E+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5E-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28
LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH
11D.11.3 Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK 9.0 member code check follows:
505 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( IS-802)
v1.0
********************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
| Y
PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN
CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==||== ---
--------- |
|MEMBER 1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | || AX
= 120.0 |
| * | LD ISA200X150X18 | || --Z AY
= 48.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | || AZ
= 36.0 |
| IS-802 * |-----------------------------| || SY
= 297.3 |
| * SZ
= 350.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.01 --->| RY
= 6.2 |
|************* RZ
= 6.3 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- ---
----------|
| L/R-Y = 48.6 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA
= 195.1 |
| L/R-Z = 47.7 BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN fa
= 145.2 |
| KL/R = 84.3 # BOLT = 32 FYB
= 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB
= 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 4.0
|
| NSF = 1.0
|
|
|
|*****************************************************************-
*********|
|*
*|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.744 1
|
| 1742.26 C 0.0 0.0 0.00
|
|*
*|
|*****************************************************************-
*********|
|
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------|
STAAD TRUSS --
PAGE NO. 5
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
----------------------
CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 18.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------
VALUE OF L/r : 48.63
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 84.31
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
507 — STAAD.Pro
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.24
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 15.0 : 167.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 9.28
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy
: 195.07 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 1
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 1742259.75 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742259.75 / 12000.0 : 145.19 MPA
RESULT : PASS
STAAD TRUSS --
PAGE NO. 6
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP : 87.66 KN
BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN
BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 32
STAAD TRUSS --
PAGE NO. 7
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( IS-802)
v1.0
********************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
| Y
PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN
CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== ---
--------- |
|MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX
= 29.2 |
| * | ST ISA150X150X10 | | | --Z AY
= 10.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ
= 10.0 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY
= 95.7 |
| * SZ
= 44.8 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 6.53 --->| RY
= 5.9 |
|************* RZ
= 3.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- --
-----------|
| L/R-Y = 47.5 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA
= 249.9 |
| L/R-Z = 94.0 BOLT CAP = 43.83 KN fa
= 48.5 |
| KL/R = 94.0 # BOLT = 3
FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0
FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 1.0
|
| NSF = 0.8
|
|
|
|*****************************************************************-
*********|
|*
*|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS TENSION 0.194 3
|
| 112.86 T 0.0 0.0 6.53
|
|*
*|
509 — STAAD.Pro
|******************************************************************-
********|
|
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
----------|
STAAD TRUSS --
PAGE NO. 8
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
----------------------
CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------
VALUE OF L/r : 93.96
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 93.96
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 400.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION
ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 3
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 112855.91 N
ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112855.91 / ( 2920.0*0.797 ) :
48.51 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
SHEARING CAP : 43.83 KN
BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN
BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 3
STAAD TRUSS --
PAGE NO. 9
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
Design of members per IS 801 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
l Z with Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced
section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section
properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as
follows:
513 — STAAD.Pro
PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The
user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and
selection of design options.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
515 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
kg/cm 2)
(3600.0
kg/cm 2)
517 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Design of members per IS 800 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
The following commands should be used to initiate design per Limit State Method of this
code:
PARAMETER n
The following commands should be used to initiate design per Working Stress Method of this
code:
PARAMETER n
Note: STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher are required for design
per WSD.
Where:
1. Slenderness
2. Section Classification
3. Tension
4. Compression
5. Shear
6. Bending
All of the design check criteria are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio from all
the above mentioned checks.
11F.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members shall not
exceed 180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not exceed 400.
You can edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as defined in Table
11F.1.
Steel sections are classified as Plastic, Compact, Semi-Compact, or Slender element sections
depending upon their local buckling characteristics.
This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section as well as nature of
the load applied to the member. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class.
STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes and design
the section for the critical load case accordingly. The Section Classification is done as per
section 3.7 of IS 800:2007 and Table B2, for Outstanding and Internal Elements of a section.
For the criteria for being included in those classes, refer to section 3.7.2-(a) – (d) of the code.
Slender Sections
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher.
The IS:800-2007 code does not provide any clear guidelines about what method should be
adopted for the design of slender section. The "Flange Only" methodology is used where it is
assumed that flexure is taken by the flanges alone and the web will resist shear with adequate
shear buckling resistance. This method requires that the flanges be non-slender elements (i.e.,
on the web is a slender element) to qualify for a valid section for design. If any of the flange
elements become slender, the design will not be performed and a warning message is
displayed in the output.
11F.2.3 Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:
521 — STAAD.Pro
l Design Strength due to Yielding in Gross Section
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of
the member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2 of the code.
The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is evaluated
as per section 6.3 of the code. Here, the number of bolts in the connection may be specified
through the use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as per section
6.4 of the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If the value of DBS is
specified as 1, additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the
program for that member.
The Net Section Area may be specified through the use of the parameter NSF.
The criteria governing the allowable stress from tension in members are based on Section 11.2.1
of the code:
l Block Shear — to prevent block shearing at the end connection. This check is made
option through use of the DBS parameter. Additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG,
and ATN must be supplied to the program for any member which is to be checked for
block shear. The code parameters,, γ and γ , are taken as 1.10 and 1.25, respectively,
M0 M1
per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the code.
These criteria are dependant on the steel material yield stress parameter, FYLD, and ultimate
tensile strength parameter, FU.
11F.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding phenomenon is the
flexural buckling.
The buckling strength of the member is affected by residual stress, initial bow and accidental
eccentricities of load.
To account for all these factors, the strength of the members subjected to axial compression is
defined by buckling class a, b, c or d as per clause 7.1.2.2 and Table 7 of IS 800:2007.
Imperfection factor, obtained from buckling class, and Euler’s Buckling Stress ultimately
govern compressive force capacity of the section as per clause 7.1.2 of IS 800:2007.
fc = FX/Ae
Where:
A = The effective section area as per Clause 7.3.2 of the code. This is equal to
e
the gross cross sectional area, AX, for any non-slender (plastic, compact, or
semi-compact) section class. In the case of slender sections, this is limited to
value of Ae as described below.
The permissive compressive stress is calculated by first determining the Buckling Class of the
section per Table 10 of the code and α & α based on Table 7.
YY ZZ
Fac = 0.6·Fcd
Where:
F = the minimum of the values of Fcd calculated for the local Y and Z axis.
cd
Fcd = (FYLD/γmo )/ [φ + (φ2 + λ2 ]
λ = (FYLD/Fcc)1/2
φ = 0.5[ 1 + a(λ - 0.2) + λ2 ]
K = the effective length factor for bending about either the local Y or Z axis, as
provided in the KY and KZ parameters, respectively.
523 — STAAD.Pro
Slender Sections
For member with slender section under axial compression, design compressive strength should
be calculated on area ignoring depth thickness ratio of web in excess of the class 3 (semi-
compact) limit.
Where:
t = thickness of web.
w
11F.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis directions
are evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following phenomena:
Among shear buckling design methods, Simple post-critical method is adopted as per sec.
8.4.2.2(a).
The actual shear stress is determined about the major and minor axes, respectively:
τbY = FY / AY
τbZ = FZ / AZ
τab = 0.70 · Vn · Av
Where:
t = Thickness of Web.
w
FYLD = Yield Strength of Web.
= √ ( 250 / FYLD )
w
K = Shear Buckling Coefficient:
v
= 5.35, when transverse stiffeners are provided only at
supports.
μ = Poisson’s Ratio
= ( 1 – 0.8 · (λw - 0.8) ) · (FYLD / √3) when, 0.8 < λw < 1.2
Slender Sections
Slender sections should be verified against shear buckling resistance if d/tw > 67 · ε for web
without stiffeners or if it exceeds 67 · ε · √(Kv ⁄5.35) for a web with stiffeners.
Design methods for resistance to shear buckling are described in clause 8.4.2.2 of IS:800-2007
code.
Vn = Vcr
Where:
525 — STAAD.Pro
V = shear force corresponding to web buckling
cr
= Av · τb
τb = fyw⁄√3
τb = fyw⁄((√3 λw2 ) )
K =
v
l 5.35 when transverse stiffeners are provided only at supports
l 4.0 + 5.35/(c/d)2 for c/d < 1.0
l 5.35 + 4.0/(c/d)2 for c/d ≥ 1.0
11F.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on whether the
member is laterally supported or unsupported.
You can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per the
provisions of the section 8.2.1 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l Section Classification
If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as per the
provisions of the section 8.2.2 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l Section Classification
Actual bending stress values are given by, about major (Z) and minor (Y) axes, respectively:
fbcz = Mz/Zecz
fbtz = Mz/Zetz
fbcy = My /Zecy
fbty = My /Zety
Where:
527 — STAAD.Pro
Torsional Buckling.
1
χLTZ =
2 2
ϕ LTZ + ϕ LTZ − λ LTZ
π 2EI y π 2EI w
M cr = 2 GI t + 2
L LT L LT
ii. About the minor axis, the permissible bending stress is calculated as for a
laterally supported section.
Slender Sections
For member with slender section subjected to bending, moment is taken by flanges alone.
Design bending strength should be calculated with effective elastic modulus disregarding the
contribution of web of the section.
Where:
The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze· fy /γm0 for “Laterally Supported” condition.
The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze· fbd /γm0 for “Laterally Un-Supported” condition.
Note: Slender section can only attain elastic moment capacity and cannot reach to plastic
moment capacity.
l Section Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code.
Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking care of the
design parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.
a. Combined Bending and Shear — No reduction in allowable stresses for the interaction
of bending and shear is considered.
b. Combined Axial Compression and Bending — The following formulas are intended to
require member stability:
Where:
529 — STAAD.Pro
f ,f = Allowable bending compressive stress about minor and major
abcy abcz
axes, respectively.
c. Combined Axial Tension and Bending — The following formulas are intended to
require member stability:
Where:
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member types.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
The internal cross section properties are calculated for the principal axes and are checked for
Tension and Compression limit states as described in this section.
531 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail
0 = No longitudinal stiffener
1 = Longitudinal stiffener is
provided at 0.2D of web from the
compression flange
2 = Longitudinal stiffeners are
provided at 0.2D and 0.5D of the
web from the compression flange
533 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail
0 = No Transverse Stiffener is
provided
1 = Transverse Stiffener is provided
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
11F.5.1 Example 1
Commands for code checking
11F.5.2 Example 2
Commands for member selection
535 — STAAD.Pro
FYLD 350 ALL
SELECT ALL
11F.6.1 Solution
Material properties:
E = 2.05(10)5 MPa
Note: This is the default value of the modulus of elasticity for steel used by STAAD.Pro. IS
800:2007 specifies that a modulus of 2.0(10)5 MPa should be used.
μ = 0.3
Force:
F = 19.644 kN (Compression)
x
F = 1.2 kN
y
F = 2.0 kN
z
M = 0.0 kN·m
x
M = 10.0 kN·m
y
M = 51.659 kN·m
z
Section Classification
Flange:
Web:
Slenderness ratio:
Imperfection factor, α, is equal to 0.49 and buckling class is c as T < 40.0 mm and buckling is
f
about YY axis (per Table 7 and Table 10 in IS 800:2007).
1
χ= = 0.86 < 1.0
2 2
0.677 + 0.677 − 0.471
537 — STAAD.Pro
Design compressive strength (per Cl.7.1.2 of IS 800:2007):
200(10) 3 800 10 2
I z = 2
12
+ 200 × 10
( 2
+ ) = 656.1(10)
2
6
mm4
Warping constant:
LLT = 5,000 mm
π 2EI y π 2EI w
M cr = 2 GIxx + 2
L LT L LT
π 22.05(10) 513.33(10)6 π 22.05(10) 52.187(10) 12
= 2 78, 846133, 333 + 2 = 449.8 kN ⋅ m
5, 000 5, 000
λLTZ =
Z ezF y
=
1.60(10)6 250 ( ) = 0.943
M cr 6
449.8(10)
67 k v / 5.35 = 81.47
Since, d/Tw > 67√(kv ⁄5.35), shear strength is governed by shear buckling.
Hence
f yw 250
τb = 2
= 2
= 82.46
3λ w 3 (1.323)
A WZ ⋅ τ b 200(10)(82.46)
VcrY = = = 300.0 kN
γ m0 1.1
11F.6.2 Comparison
Table 11F.2-IS 800:2007 Verification Problem 1
Item Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
539 — STAAD.Pro
Item Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
(Laterally
unsupported)
(Laterally
unsupported)
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 22-OCT-08
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 5 0; 3 5 5 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
START USER TABLE
TABLE 1
UNIT METER KN
WIDE FLANGE
SLEND
0.0088 0.82 0.006 0.2 0.01 0.000912133 1.33477E-005 1.90933E-007
0.00492 0.004
END
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 UPTABLE 1 SLEND
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
2 TABLE ST ISMB500
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
3 FY -2
MEMBER LOAD
2 UNI GY -2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 1.2
2 FZ -2
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
KY 0.33 ALL
STP 2 ALL
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***LATERALLY UNSUPPORTED****
*LAT 1 ALL
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
541 — STAAD.Pro
PARAMETER 2
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
KY 0.33 ALL
STP 2 ALL
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***LATERALLY SUPPORTED****
LAT 1 ALL
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
11F.6.4 Output
TRACK 2.0 output for the Laterally unsupported check
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0)
************************************************
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Member Number: 1
|
| Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT)
|
| Status: PASS Ratio: 0.401 Critical Load Case: 1
Location: 0.00 |
| Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE)
|
| FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ:
-2.000E+00 |
| MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ:
51.659E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Section Properties: (Unit: CM )
|
| AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03
RZZ: 32.195E+00|
| AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03
RYY: 3.895E+00|
| AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00
CW: 2.187E+06|
| ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03
|
************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Member Number: 1
|
| Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT)
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Tension: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU:
420.000E+03 |
| NSF: 1.000 ALPHA:
0.800 DBS: 0 |
| Capacity: 2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2
|
| Actual Design Force: 0.000E+00 LC: 0
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Compression: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl.
7.1.2.2 |
| Capacity: 1.076E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2
|
| Actual Design Force: 19.644E+00 LC: 1
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
543 — STAAD.Pro
| Shear: (Unit:KN )
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 359.732E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2 |
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -2.000E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 299.776E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Bending: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Parameters: Laterally Unsupported KX: 1.00 LX:
5.000E+00 General |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 208.681E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.2 |
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -10.000E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 30.303E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Combined Interaction:
|
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ:
0.900 |
| Interaction Ratio: 0.401 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from
Start |
|
|
| Tension 0.000 0
0.000E+00 |
| Compression 0.018 1
0.000E+00 |
| Shear Major 0.003 1
0.000E+00 |
| Shear Minor 0.007 1
0.000E+00 |
| Bend Major 0.248 1
0.000E+00 |
| Bend Minor 0.340 1
0.000E+00 |
************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Member Number: 1
|
| Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT)
|
| Status: PASS Ratio: 0.360 Critical Load Case: 1
Location: 0.00 |
| Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE)
|
| FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ:
-2.000E+00 |
| MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ:
51.659E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Section Properties: (Unit: CM )
|
| AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03
RZZ: 32.195E+00|
| AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03
RYY: 3.895E+00|
| AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00
CW: 2.187E+06|
| ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03
|
| ZEY: 133.477E+00 ZPY: 207.200E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Slenderness Check: (Unit: METE)
|
| Actual Length: 5.000E+00
|
| Parameters: LZ: 5.000E+00 LY: 5.000E+00
|
545 — STAAD.Pro
| KZ: 1.000 KY: 0.330
|
| Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD: 1 FX:
19.644E+00 C |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Section Class: Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web
Class: Slender |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0)
************************************************
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Member Number: 1
|
| Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT)
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Tension: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU:
420.000E+03 |
| NSF: 1.000 ALPHA:
0.800 DBS: 0 |
| Capacity: 2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2
|
| Actual Design Force: 0.000E+00 LC: 0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Compression: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl.
7.1.2.2 |
| Capacity: 1.076E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2
|
| Actual Design Force: 19.644E+00 LC: 1
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------|
| Shear: (Unit:KN )
|
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 359.732E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2 |
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -2.000E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 299.776E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.4.2 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Bending: (Unit:KN METE)
|
| Parameters: Laterally Supported KX: 1.00 LX:
5.000E+00 General |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 363.710E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1 |
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -10.000E+00 LC: 1
Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 30.303E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl.
8.2.1.1 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Combined Interaction:
|
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ:
0.900 |
| Interaction Ratio: 0.360 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1
|
| LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
| Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from
Start |
|
|
| Tension 0.000 0
0.000E+00 |
| Compression 0.018 1
0.000E+00 |
| Shear Major 0.003 1
0.000E+00 |
| Shear Minor 0.007 1
0.000E+00 |
| Bend Major 0.142 1
0.000E+00 |
| Bend Minor 0.340 1
0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.1.1 0.360 1
0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z) 0.126 1
5.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y) 0.141 1
5.000E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------
------------------|
547 — STAAD.Pro
Section 12
Japanese Codes
Design of members per AIJ requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm
width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be
assumed to be circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Warning: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section area (AX) as
an input.
The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis. Secondary
moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of
a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic
stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and
design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is
equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments.
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the
first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in
the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations
of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due
to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments,
whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections.
Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the
user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is
utilized by providing the magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the
parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The column is designed for the axial load and total of
primary and secondary biaxial moments if the first method is used and for the axial load and
magnified biaxial moments if the second method is used.
Example
UNIT KG CM
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
551 — STAAD.Pro
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the
section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth
and redesign the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:
a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design
c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure
design.
d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact
that Japan is a high seismic zone area.
For seismic loading it is needed to increase shear force ≥ 1.5 times the actual value and this can
be done utilizing the Design Shear Modification factor, k (SMAG parameter) without changing
the Design Moment.
Notes:
b. Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is 2.3 kg/sq.
cm
the MMAG parameter is used, the column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the
SMAG parameter is used, column shear force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and
square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg
value is calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is 1.0, the
program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always
uniaxial.
Steps involved:
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and
checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual
moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design
conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt
maximum value.
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 ´ (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 £ a £ 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap &
Pcap represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap,
Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues
until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied
(if uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no.
of bars and details output is written.
12A.5.1 Example
553 — STAAD.Pro
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement.
The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The following
parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design:
3. CLEAR — Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
The other parameters shown in Table 12A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
(Column)
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
555 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Column Design:
557 — STAAD.Pro
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Japanese code AIJ 2005
Specifications for structural steel design.
Design of members per AIJ 2005 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
12B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the
“Architectural Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (2005 edition)
in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic
analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in
performing the steel design:
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005 from the AIJ
2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design methods, etc., remain
unchanged. Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for additional details.
12B.2.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required
by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia
about Y axis and Z axis ( I , I ) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Z ,
yy zz z
Z , i , i using appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for
y y z
bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( I )and sectional area ( A ) for 1/6th
i i
section and then uses following formula:
i = √(Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections.
i. Axial Stress:
λ 2
( )
1 − 0.4 Λ F
when λ ≤ Λ
fc = ν
0.227F
when λ > Λ
λ 2
( )
Λ
Where:
π 2E
Λ=
0.6F
3 2 λ 2
ν=
2
+ ()
3 Λ
559 — STAAD.Pro
ii. Bending Stress:
( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
Where:
Where:
λb = My / Me
e λb = 1 / 0.6
qy = Qy / Aww
Where:
Where:
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements:
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the
conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any
condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked) = fm/
(k⋅ft)
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear) are
calculated as for AIJ 2002. See "Member Capacities" on page 577
561 — STAAD.Pro
from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that
they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
563 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1.0 = No sidesway
1 = Temporary Loading
12B.3.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. See Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local
displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members will be equal
to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be
used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and
DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
565 — STAAD.Pro
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on
the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ),
indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are
performed at locations indicated by the BEAM parameter. The default is set that this check is
not performed. The MISES parameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter.
Where:
Fx My Mz
σx = + +
Ax Zy Zz
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z
2 2
Mx Fy Fz
τxy = + +
Zx Ay Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus
x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation)
is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises
stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is
printed as RATIO and “VON MISES” is printed as CRITICAL COND.
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 0.3 meters is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN in the Y
direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kN·m torque applied at the end. Axial
tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5 section is used from the
Japanese steel tables.
Given
Section properties
-10.0 kN (Tension)
567 — STAAD.Pro
0.6 kN·m (Bending-Y)
-3.0 kN (Shear-Y)
-2.0 kN (Shear-Z)
Material
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
From these section forces, σ and τ at the section of the fixed end are calculated as follows:
x xy
Fx My Mz −10, 000 −900, 000
σx = + + = +
600, 000
+
Ax Zy Zz 1, 185 5, 920 37, 400 = 8.44 + 101.35 + 24.06 = 133.85
N/mm2
2 2
Fy
τxy =
Mx
+ +
Fz −8, 000 −3, 000 2 −2, 000 2
= + +
Zx Ay Az 2, 143 500 467 = 3.73 + 6 2 + 4.28 2 = 11.10
N/mm2
Since ft = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent loading,
Comparison
Output
569 — STAAD.Pro
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 0.30 --->| iY = 1.12 |
|************* iZ = 3.97 |
| ZX = 2.14 |
| 0.90(KN-MET) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN N MM | L1 L1 IN N MM|
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 26.8 | L1 FA = 189.5 |
| KL/R-Z= 7.6 + L1 fa = 8.4 |
| UNL = 2.5 | L1 L1 FCZ = 200.0 |
| CB = 1.75 + FTZ = 200.0 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 200.0 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 L1 FTY = 200.0 |
| FYLD = 300.0 | L0 fbz = 24.1 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 101.4 |
| DFF = 0.0 -0.05 FV = 115.5 |
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv = 6.0 |
| (WITH LOAD NO.) FT = 200.0 |
| fm = 135.2 |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET) Sx = 133.9 |
| ------------------------- Tou = 11.1 |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE -10.00 3.00 2.00 0.60 0.90 |
| LOCATION 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 |
| LOADING 1 1 1 1 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
| ====================================================== |
| PASS VON MISES 0.676 1 |
| 10.00 T 0.60 -0.90 0.000 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Design of members per AIJ 2002 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
12C.1 General
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable
stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in
performing the steel design:
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
12C.3 Member Property Specifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section
library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands
used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be
specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section
1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be
obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
12C.4.1 I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
12C.4.2 H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
12C.4.3 T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
573 — STAAD.Pro
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
12C.4.4 Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10
45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0
28 TO 30 TA FR C200X90X8 SP 2.5
12C.4.6 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification
is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and
then the thickness of the leg, all in millimeters. The word ST signifies that the section is a
standard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis
specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's
Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0
36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 100X65X7
angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back double angle
comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
12C.4.8 Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of
0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE
sections.
575 — STAAD.Pro
12C.4.9 Pipes (General Pipe sections)
Circular hollow sections defined by JIS G3444:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures -
Based on Allowable Stress Concept as general pipe sections are specified as shown in the
following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE PIP267.4X7.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 267.0 mm and a thickness of 7.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE CHS660.4X16
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 660.4 mm and a thickness of 16.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE RHS200X100X12
specifies a tube with a depth of 200 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a thickness of 12 mm. Only
code checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE SHS200XS00X12
specifies a square tube with a width of 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking,
no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
10 TA ST TUBE DT 3.0 WT 2.5 TH 0.25
* PIPE
11 TA ST PIPE OD 3.0 ID 2.5
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
577 — STAAD.Pro
12C.5.1 Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE,
Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt
the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE
available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12C.5.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by
AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia
about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz,
Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for
bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th
section and then uses following formula:
i = Ii / A i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections.
Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be determined on
the basis of the values of F given in the following table.
Thick- SN400 SN490 SS400 SS4- SS5- SM40- SM49- SM5- SM5-
ness 90 40 0 0 20 70
SNR4- SNR4- STK400
00 90 SMA4- SM49-
STKR400
00 0Y
STKN- STKN-
SSC400
400 490 SMA4-
SWH400 90
STKR-
490
STK49-
0
i. Axial Stress:
579 — STAAD.Pro
λ 2
( )
1 − 0.4 Λ F
when λ ≤ Λ
fc = ν
0.227F
when λ > Λ
λ 2
( )
Λ
where:
π 2E
Λ=
0.6F
3 2 λ 2
ν=
2
+ ()
3 Λ
( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
Where:
qy = Qy / Aww
Where:
Where:
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the
conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any
condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that the section fails.
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design
requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the
conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for
any condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section
fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
581 — STAAD.Pro
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked) =
f /(k⋅f )
m t
Note: This output format is available only when the BEAM parameter value is 0 and the
TRACK parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information will
be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design
information will be printed.
Example:
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
583 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
585 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
12C.7.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement.
See Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined
by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2,
DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end
node, as the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation
of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members will be equal
to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be
used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and
DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along
the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are
specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on the forces at
the start and end joints of the member. The code checking output labels the members as
587 — STAAD.Pro
PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance
from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
SELECT ALL
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on
the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ),
indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are
performed at locations indicated by the BEAM parameter. The default is set that this check is
not performed. The MISES parameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter.
Where:
Fx My Mz
σx = + +
Ax Zy Zz
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z
2 2
Mx Fy Fz
τxy = + +
Zx Ay Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus
x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation)
is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises
stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is
printed as RATIO and “VON MISES” is printed as CRITICAL COND.
589 — STAAD.Pro
Section 13
Mexican Codes
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333
11 13 PR YD 20.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48. YB 18. ZB 12.
17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18. ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to
be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For
concrete design, this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias
are not provided, the program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the
above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using
YD and ZD. This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section
parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape
and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.)
provided, the program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or T-
shaped and the BEAM design will be done accordingly.
The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the input file.
For example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design), the
distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam, are assigned values of zero by
default but may be changed depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns
are designed for moments directly obtained from the analyses without any magnification.
The factors MMY and MMZ may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the
user may generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load factors.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
593 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Parameters
Name
1. Class 1 Concrete
2. Class 2 Concrete
595 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Parameters
Name
l FALSE - No
l TRUE - Yes
Column Design
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual
‘mm‘ units instead of the bar number. The following metric bar sizes are available:
4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50
mm and 60 mm.
597 — STAAD.Pro
load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum allowable for the cross
section, the program reports that beam fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections
are also designed with compression reinforcement.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of
main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups
and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC
Concrete are utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum
allowable and minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and
ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 13A.1).
In addition, the maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment
MY is not considered in the flexural design.
13A.5.4 Output
Level
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height
Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam
Bar Info
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size
From
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar
To
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar
Anchor (STA/END)
States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the start (STA)
or at the end (END).
Row
Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross section
(ZD for a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of cross section (YD
minus the distance from extreme tension fiber to the centroid of main
reinforcement).
ROWMN
Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd)
ROWMX
Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd)
Spacing
Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement
Vu
Factored shear force at section
Vc
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vs
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Tu
Factored torsional moment at section
Tc
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
599 — STAAD.Pro
AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 5.63 KN Vc= 0.00 KN Vs= 0.00 KN
Tu= 0.09 Kn Me Tc= 0.00 Kn Me Ts= 0.00 Kn Me LOAD 1
STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
Steps involved:
3. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the section.
Ensure that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If
PNMAX is less than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength reduction factor) increase
the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for
ductile design), the column cannot be designed with its current dimensions.
4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the uniaxial
moment capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes, independently. These values
are referred to as MYCAP and MZCAP respectively.
6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar sizes, find
the uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If the equation is
satisfied now, the reinforcement details are written to the output file.
By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be checked as
beams and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement adopted.
l P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment zero).
l Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column.
l P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition.
l M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition.
l E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition.
l M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load.
l P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column.
l Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load
for the critical load case.
l Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Mu is
the bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load case.
l Mu = Ö (Mux.Mmagx)²+ (Muy.Mmagy)²
l e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column
P0 Pn max
P-bal. M-bal.
e-bal.(cm)
601 — STAAD.Pro
2095196.38
2095196.38 727411.12 29235398.00
40.2
M0 P-tens.
Des.Pn 'Des.Mn e/h
20606994.00
-550620.00 0.00
20000000.00 NaN
--------------------------------------------------------
Pn Mn
Pn Mn
|
1934027.38 5373253.50 967013.69 27278232.00
P0 |*
1772858.50 11408365.00 805844.75 28658428.00
Pn | *
1128182.62 25462606.00 161168.95 24433192.00
NOMINAL| *
AXIAL| *
COMPRESSION|
*
Pb|-------*Mb
| *
___________|____*_______
| * M0 Mn,
| * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the
element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed
at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to
resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required
to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB,
CLS, CLT, DIM, and EXP listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters
mentioned are not used in slab design.
Figure 13A.2 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
603 — STAAD.Pro
13B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per NTC 1987
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Mexican code NTC 1987
(Normas Técnicas Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras Metálicas)
(Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures –
Dec. 1987) or the Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal (Mexican
Construction Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993).
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
13B.1 General
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit
States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which
they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and
stability. It allows to check deformation to verify serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type,
or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as
implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is
presented here.
The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance. Because the
different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads
and of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is possible.
Yi Qi ≤ Rn FR
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load
effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design strength, on the right
i i
side, is the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by a resistance factor, FR.
n
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use
appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design
portion of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments)
obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns
etc.), resistance (nominal strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically
considered.
In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members are
required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the
member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member
selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on
appropriate members before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy
of a given member.
605 — STAAD.Pro
effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a particular
member is calculated by STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the
NTC. For slender elements, the procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used.
The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of the
Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures (de
los Comentarios, ayudas de diseño y ejemplos de las Normas Técnicas Complementarias para el
Diseño y Construcción de Estructuras Metálicas, DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were
implemented for the determination of design strength for these limit states.
Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of
the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken
into consideration.
The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced
length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and the bending coefficient. The
limiting laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural resistance Mr are functions of the section
geometry and are calculated as per the procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC.
The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the moment gradient
on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can be specified by the user through the use of
parameter CB or CBy (see Table 11B.1) or may be calculated by the program (according to
LRDF USA specification) if CB is specified as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default
value of 1.0 will be used.
To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF (see Table
10B.1) can be used.
It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web according to
section 4.5.8 of the NTC
For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification was used.
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the
shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area
under tension.
It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid elements
so that the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The program has included
607 — STAAD.Pro
formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the
columns individually and not the complete floor analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly
restrained.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these
parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only.
Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified again.
This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 13B.1-Design Parameters According to Mexican NTC Standards - Steel
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
CMB 1.0 =
Members ends are
restricted
angularly.
CMB 0.85 =
Members ends are
not restricted
angularly.
609 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0. Main member
1. Secondary and wind
trusses
611 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1. For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 from Table 2B.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.
2. Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis
if SET Z UP is used).
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the design.
If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.
Design of members per NS 3472 / NPD requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l Double angles
l Tapered tubes
l Prismatic sections with too few section parameters defined
l Other sections that are not in the ‘available’ list above
l NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available through two
separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.
l This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document explains how,
and which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been implemented in
STAAD.Pro.
l When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
l Weld design is not included in the Norwegian code checks.
l The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is not
identical to the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for use of the
program.
14A.1.1 Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]
14A.1.2 References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001
Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984
Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
In general NS is used for all cross sections and shapes listed in section 1 of this manual. An
exception is the treatment and check of pipe members in framed structures. NS does not give
617 — STAAD.Pro
specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section 3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS
is selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the effect of
local buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In addition, the NPD
code gives joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections for pipe members.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis
and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or
capacities and the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. It
is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like the
provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the
parameters listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most
circumstances. However, the user should control the design and verify results through the use
of the design parameters.
The equivalent moment factor β is calculated using the procedure of NS table 12. Two different
approaches are used depending upon whether the members can sway or not. Conditions for
sidesway and transverse loading can be specified through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ.
For members that cannot sway, without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and
proper dimensioning moments are used in the interaction formulae.
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF parameter.
The nominal stresses should satisfy
fy
σj ≤ = fd
γm
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and 3.1.3 requires
that the structural coefficient is considered.
fk
S d ≤ fkd =
γ m ⋅ γ mk (S d)
Where:
619 — STAAD.Pro
γ = structural coefficient
mk
γ is default set to 1.10.
m
γ shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members γ is a function of the reduced
mk mk
slenderness. In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated automatically.
Check b) provides the unity check based on the beam-column buckling interaction formulae
in NPD 3.2.2. The interaction between global and local buckling due to axial load and
hydrostatic pressure is accounted for through computation of an axial characteristic capacity to
replace the yield stress inn the beam-column buckling formulae.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments and
hydrostatic pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses resulting from
shear and torsion are of minor importance, e.g., in jacket braces.
Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-stiffened
cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential
compression or tension, torsion or shear. The unity check refers to the interaction formulae in
NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability requirement is given in NPD 3.4.7.
For heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.1590, and for non heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.2420.
Tracks 1.0 and 9.0 print buckling curve H for heat-treated, and buckling curve N for non neat-
treated. The yield check is the same as for steel.
621 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description Reference
Name Value
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe
members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
14A.3.1 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
Norwegian steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
623 — STAAD.Pro
have to be evaluated in each separate case.
Effects from local buckling or external hydrostatic pressure on pipes and tubes are not
included.
14A.4.1 Buckling
nmax + kz × mz + ky × my ≤ 1
Where:
i = z,y
nmax = n/χmin
n = Nf/Nd
χmin = min(χz,χy )
χi = Nkd,i/Nd
n
ki = 1−µi ≤ 1.5
χ iγ m
μi = λi(2·βMi - 4) ≤ 0.9
β ref. NS Tab. 12
Mi
n
kLT = 1 − µ LT ≤ 1.0
χ yγ m
λi = λi/λ1
λi = Lki/ii
E
λi = π
fy
1
χi =
2 2
ϕ+ ϕ −λ
Mcr = ψ·Mvio
β = 1.3
M0
β = 1.4
M0
M0
βM = βM , ψ +
∆M (β M,0 )
− βM , ψ
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
625 — STAAD.Pro
βy =SSY
βz=SSZ
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input parameter
CB), L = member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
π 2EI y 2 5a
M vix = ϕ
L
2 ( 5a
π
2
+
rx
3 )
− ys + C 2 − 2 +
π
rx
3
− ys
Where:
C w + 0.039L 2I T
C2 =
Iy
α = distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting, assumed to be
on top flange.
The φ parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
627 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.2 - ψ-coefficients for a partially restrained beam
629 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.4 - ψ-coefficients for the cantilevered beam with single loads and distributed loads. Dashed curves
apply load on the surface.
Where:
N N N
= max ,
N kd
N kzd N kyd
N My Mz
IR = + + ≤ 1.0
N kd N N
M yd1 − M zd1 −
N Eyd N Ezd
Where:
N N N
= max
N kzd N kyd
,
N kd
N and N are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-axis, respectively.
kyd kzd
For λ ≤ √(2)
λeff = λ
Where:
λk fy
λ=
π E
λk = lk /i
i = I/ A
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included in the
code check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
σbz = ± Mz/W z
631 — STAAD.Pro
2 fy
σcγmk + Bσ *b + (B zσ bz)2 + (B yσ by) ≤
γm
Where:
π 2E 2
fE = 2
i
lk
i = I/ A
σ *b = σc − 11 −
fy fk
fk γ mfE
l = kl
k
k = effective length factor
Where:
2 f y σ ao σb0 σp 0 τ
λ = + + +
σj fea feτ
feb fep
σ j = (σa + σ b)2 − σa + σ b σ p + σ p2 + 3τ 2
( )
σ ≥ 0 when
a
σa0 = 0
σ < 0 when
a
σa0 = -σa
σ ≥ 0 when
b
σb0 = 0
σ < 0 when
b
σb0 = -σb
σ ≥ 0 when
p
σp0 = 0
σ < 0 when
p
σp0 = σp
σ = design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
σ = design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment (tension
b
positive)
τ = design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear force.
S
f , f , f and f are the elastic buckling resistances of curved panels or circular
ea eb ep eι
cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression forces, global bending
moments, lateral pressure, and torsional moments and/or shear forces
respectively.
π 2E 2
fe = k (t )
12(1 − ν ) l
2
pξ 2
k = ψ 1+ ( )ψ
The values of ψ, ζ, and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading cases.
633 — STAAD.Pro
Table 14A.3-Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylindrical shells
ψ ζ p
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent of shell
length. For cases with:
1 r
> 3.85
r t
σj < fkd
∆σ = Bσa − 11 −
fk
+ B − 1σ b
fy
fk fe
Where:
1
B=
1−µ
λ = fy / fe
2
π E
fe =
λ2
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each stress
Where:
635 — STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.5 - Stress points checked for a wide flange section
Section Properties
τy = Fy /Ay
τz = Fz/Az
Tz = dA × y
Stress calculation
Mx V yTz VzT y
τ = τx + τ y + τ z = c+ +
Ix Iz Iy
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported
torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate
evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on
surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
Section properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for tapered sections
x x y z
where these values are calculated for each section checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are
637 — STAAD.Pro
taken from the middle of the member.)
A z = 2 / 3(b ⋅ t + b 1 ⋅ t 1)
3 3 2
b t ⋅ b 1 t 1(h − t / 2 − t 1 / 2)
Cw =
( 3
12 b t + b 1 t 1
3
) ref. NS app. C3
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 635 for equations used in section property
calculations.
Stress calculation
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 635 for equations used in general stress
calculations.
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
Table 14A.5-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a singly
symmetric wide flange section
Point
σ σ σ τ τ τ
No x by bz x y z
My b
1 − 0 0
Iy 2
Mz Mx F y bt (h 1 + t / 2) Fz t b 2
2 0 h2 t
Iz Ix Iz 2t I y 8t
My b
3 Iy 2 0 0
Mz F y bt (h 1 + t / 2)
4 0 h1 0
Iz Iz s
5
Fx
0 0 Mx ( ) 2
F y bt h 1 + t / 2 + 0.5h 1 s
0
Ax s Iz s
Ix
Mz F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2)
6 0 − h3 0
Iz Iz s
My b
7 − 1
0 0
Iy 2
Mz Mx F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2) Fz t 1b 2
8 0 − h4 t
Iz Ix Iz 2t 1 I y 8t 1
My b
1
9 Iy 2 0 0
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported
torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate
evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on
surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 ( D-t )
a = tan-1 M /M
z y
Ax = π/4 (D2 - d 2)
A = A = 0.5A
y z x
I = 2I =π/32 (D4 - d 4)
x z
639 — STAAD.Pro
I = I = π/64 (D4 - d 4)
y z
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values are used
for A , A and I , however this has insignificant influence on the
y z x
force distribution.
A = A = 0.6A
Y z x
I = 2πR3t
x
Section Properties
641 — STAAD.Pro
Stress calculation at selected stress points
643 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
645 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z.
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z
M = F Z4
T y
M = F Y4
T z
This torsion moment is included in M if F and F exist.
x y Z
Note: The order of the joint numbers in the member incidence command specifies the
direction of the local x-axis.
647 — STAAD.Pro
International Design Codes Manual — 648
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
Note: Note that ‘b’ may not be much greater than ‘h’. If that is the case, define the
member with h > b and Beta angle 90° instead.
Section Properties
649 — STAAD.Pro
General Stress Calculation
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2
The punching shear run sequence is performed in two steps. The program will first identify all
tubular joints and classify them as T type joints (TRACK99). The joints to be checked will be
listed in a file specified in the CODE NPD parameter list, below called GEOM1. This file is
used as input in the second run. The file is an editable ACSII file saved under the file name
given in the CODE NPD parameter. The TRACK parameter is then set to 98 which directs the
program to read from the file GEOM1 file and use it as input to the second run, i.e., the joint
capacity checking. The program will check the capacity for both chord members entering the
joint. The local y and z moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the joint itself
and the far end joints of the brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of plane moments.
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap, can or
stub dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The program will not
change the brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified in the input file GEOM1.
See Appendix A page xx for GEOM1 example file.
KO K joint overlapped
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
ß = r/R
g = R/T
651 — STAAD.Pro
g = a/D
f = Yield stress
y
Q = Factor
f
Q = See table 6.1
g
Q = See table 6.1
u
Q d = See table 6.1
ß
N = Design axial force in brace
Where:
2
f yT
Nk = Q uQ f
sin Θ
Q is given in Table 6.1 and Q is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress in the
u f
chord.
Qf = 1.0 - 0.03γA2
2 2 2
σ ax + σIP + σ OP
A2 = 2
0.64f y
X (2.7 + 13β)
Q
β
K 0.90
(2+21β)Q
β
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
2
d f yT
MIPk = Q uQ f
sin Θ
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
2
d f yT
MOPk = Q uQ f
sin Θ
653 — STAAD.Pro
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction equation should
be satisfied:
2
+ IP +
N M M OP 1
≤
Nk M IPk M OPk γm
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total load
component normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
Nk l1 2f y t wl 2
NN = sin Θ +
γm l 3 γm
l = circumference for that portion of the brace in contact with the chord (actual
l
length)
TRACK Description
no.
49 Prints member end forces for members entering each joint (at
the end of the member connected to the joint)
kN-
MYs Start moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYm Mid moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYe End moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYb Buckling moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MZs Start moment about z-axis
m
655 — STAAD.Pro
Symbol Description Unit
kN-
MZm Mid moment about the z-axis
m
kN-
MZe End moment about the z-axis
m
kN-
MZb Buckling moment about z-axis
m
Note: Myb and Mzb are the design moments used for max unity ratio.
N/mm
FYLD Allowable yield strength 2
657 — STAAD.Pro
5.1 1.3 2.5 5.1 STAB 0.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=2.152 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=0.602 FakY=1.500 |
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM |
| IR1 = 0.784 IR2 = 0.784 VON MISES = 0.510 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
4 24.20 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.30 1
FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS)
-0.2 -1.4 -2.9 2.9 STAB 14.14
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.510 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=1.500 FakY=1.500 |
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM |
| IR1 = 1.304 IR2 = 1.304 VON MISES = 0.310 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
659 — STAAD.Pro
Output example for TRACK 3
Member in tension:
Member in compression:
661 — STAAD.Pro
International Design Codes Manual — 662
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
663 — STAAD.Pro
International Design Codes Manual — 664
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
665 — STAAD.Pro
Output example for TRACK 98.0
667 — STAAD.Pro
Output example for TRACK 32
l The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only.
l The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as described in
the following sections.
Also, N-004 does not specify steel grades to be used. Therefore, this STAAD.Pro uses the steel
grades per EN 1993-1-1:2005 for designs per N-004.
Note: Ring stiffener design to CL. 6.3.6.2 is not included for this implementation.
Warning: Only tubular sections can be used with the N-004 code in STAAD.Pro. A
warning is presented for any other section type.
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning will be
issued by the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses ‘Y’ to define the action effects that is in plane and ‘Z’ to define out of
plane effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where ‘Z’ defines the in
plane effects and ‘Y’ the out of plane effects. This document will follow the
STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes.
The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic pressure
and those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program allows you to specify
whether a member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not and, if so, to specify the
hydrostatic pressure for the element. By default the program will assume that all members are
not subject to any hydrostatic pressure. The design parameter HYD is used to specify the
maximum water level with respect to the origin.
If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level and will
evaluate the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear increase in pressure
with depth (The density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m 3). Also, if the HYD parameter is
specified, the program will assume that the hydrostatic loads have not been included in the
analysis. For members that are subject to a combination of loads (i.e., bending plus
compression) along with a hydrostatic pressure, the design will be done according to Clause
6.3.9 of the code. In the absence of any hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be
performed in accordance with Clause 6.3.8 of the code.
671 — STAAD.Pro
N ≤N = A⋅f /γ
Sd t,Rd y m
Where:
N ≤N = A⋅f /γ
Sd c,Rd c m
Where:
i = Radius of gyration.
t = wall thickness
For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will be classed
y cle
as a CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material factor (γ ) used in the
m
above checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl. 6.3.7) of the code.
14B.5 Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall satisfy:
M ≤M = f ⋅W/γ
Sd Rd m m
Where:
14B.6 Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy:
V ≤V = A⋅f /(2√3⋅γ )
Sd Rd y m)
Where:
673 — STAAD.Pro
M ≤M = 2⋅I f /(D√3⋅γ )
T,Sd T,Rd py m)
Where:
σ ≤f = f /γ
p,Sd h,Rd h m)
Where:
σ = p ⋅D/(2⋅t)
p,Sd Sd
p = Design hydrostatic pressure
Sd
f = Characteristic hoop buckling strength
h
γ = Refer to clause 6.3.7
m)
The characteristic hoop buckling strength f , will be calculated as follows:
h
f = f when f > 2.44⋅f
h y he y
f = 0.7⋅f (f /f )0.4 when 2.44⋅f ≥ f > 0.55⋅f
h y he y y he y
f =f when f ≤ 0.55⋅f
h he he y
The elastic hoop buckling strength f will be worked out as follows:
he
f = 2C E⋅t/D
he h
Where:
Where:
M is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis)
y,Sd
M is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
z,Sd
N is the design axial force
Sd
M is the moment resistance (as determined by Clause 6.3.4)
Rd
N is the tension capacity of the section (as determined by Clause 6.3.2)
t,Rd
and
Where:
N and N are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are given by:
ey ez
675 — STAAD.Pro
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code.
M = W⋅f /γ
Red,Rd m,Red m
f = f √[1 - 3(τ /f )2]
m,Red m T,Sd d
τ = M /(2π⋅R2⋅t)
T,Sd T,Sd
f = f /γ
d y m
R = Radius of the tubular member
The choice of method for checking members subject to combined forces and hydrostatic
pressure used by STAAD.Pro will depend on the HYD parameter specified as a design
parameter. If the HYD parameter has been specified, then the program will assume that the
hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis and will perform the necessary
checks as per Method A in code. If, on the other hand, the HYD parameter has not been
specified, the program will use the section forces and use Method B in the code.
Where:
Where:
f = f /γ
cl,Rd cl m
677 — STAAD.Pro
f is the characteristic local buckling strength (as determined by
cl
Clause 6.3.3)
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5⋅f
cle he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
Where:
Where:
and
Where:
σ is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from hydrostatic
a,Sd
pressure
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5⋅f
cle he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
and
679 — STAAD.Pro
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms).
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f /γ > 0.5⋅f /γ
cle m he m
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
Where:
681 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting start point for calculation
of member of “deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for calculation
of member of “deflection length”
14B.14.1 Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters
The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and depend
on the joint and load type:
Table 14B.2-Default values for C1 and C2 parameters
Joint Type C1 C2
Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in the
external geometry file.
14B.14.2 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
NORSOK N-004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
683 — STAAD.Pro
PSD 10 MEMB 7 10
SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have
passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of NORSOK code, the value of the ratio of
the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value),
the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in
the member) where the critical condition occurs.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the three
categories given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a BRACE member
connecting into a CHORD member is classified into one of these categories based on the axial
force components in the brace. The classification normally considers all the members at a
joint that lie in a plane. N-004 defines three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a
combination of these).
Joint Description
Classification
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-004 code. It is
worth noting that the joint class for each brace will be different for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints. This is left
up to the engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the generation of
685 — STAAD.Pro
the external geometry file. Joints should be re-classified as necessary before
performing the final joint capacity checks.
The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro performs the
checks as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal with conical joint transitions
and joints with joint cans. The code also specifies checks and limits for the gaps and
eccentricity of joints. This implementation will not perform such geometry checks.
The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the following
sections.
The following syntax is used to initiate the joint checking in the engine.
PARAMETER 1
Where:
For each node specified in the CHECK JOINT command, the program automatically separates
out all the members at the node into one CHORD member and one or more BRACE members.
The section with the biggest diameter is assumed to be the CHORD and all the other
members are assumed as BRACE members. If two or more possible CHORD members have the
same diameter, the member with the maximum thickness is considered as the CHORD. The
angle between the two members should be within the range of 30° and 90° (inclusive).
Once all the CHORD and BRACE members are identified, the program considers every
CHORD to BRACE connection as a separate JOINT. The program the automatically creates the
joints and initially considers all the joints as joint class Y. The program then performs all the
necessary joint checks as detailed in the following sections and produces the design output.
The program will also produce an output file called filename_ JOINTS.txt, where "filename"
will be the name of the .STD file. This format of this text file is explained in Section 14B.8.
You can then edit this text file to set up the necessary design parameters. Once the program
finds of the _JOINTS.txt file, it will read in the necessary parameters from this file and
perform the subsequent design checks.
Note: This file will be produced only once (i.e., when this file does not exist). If this file
exists, it is assumed that you have already done a joint design check and hence the
program reads the values from this file and uses these for joint checks.
f yT 2
NRd = Q uQ f
γ M sin θ
f y T 2d
MRd = Q uQ f
γ Msin θ
Where:
Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action type in the
u
brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for these equations.
Q = 1.0 – λA2
f
σ
2 σ my
2 2
,Sd + σ mz,Sd
A 2 = C1 a ,Sd + C 2
fy 1.62f y 2
See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms for
various joint classes.
687 — STAAD.Pro
2
N Sd M M y ,Sd
+ z,Sd + ≤1
N Rd M z,Rd M y ,Rd
Where:
Where:
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type,
respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1).
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value
of GAP is assumed as 0.
14B.19.2 Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4
JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE
BLEN D T GAP
1 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 1 4.0
0.140 0.010 0
2 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 16 6.04
0.075 0.005 0
Member
the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
the steel section name which has been checked against the N-004 code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the N-004 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and
tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable
shear stress (FV).
689 — STAAD.Pro
************************************************
z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia : 862.000 862.000
Plastic modulus : 168.554 168.554
Elastic modulus : 123.407 123.407
Radius of gyration : 4.602 4.602
Effective Length : 400.000 400.000
=======================================================================
691 — STAAD.Pro
14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Norwegian code NS 3473
2001 Concrete Structures - Design and detailing rules.
Design of members per NS 3473 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
1. LA — Least aggressive
2. NA — Aggressive
3. MA — Very aggressive
693 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per SNiP 2.03.01-84* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
15A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method
of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* defines two groups of limit states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l fatigue failure,
l failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service
conditions,
l excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the
maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit
states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio
between design and normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is
determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 “Loads and actions”.
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0°,
or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180°.
Example:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* COLUMNS OF RECTANGULAR CROSS-SECTION
1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350.
* COLUMNS OF CIRCULAR CROSS-SECTION
17 TO 22 PRI YD 350.
* BEAMS OF T CROSS-SECTION
23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200.
UNIT METER
ELEMENT PROPERTY
41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14
101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16
* FLANGE OF T BEAMS IS LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM ZONE OF CROSS-
SECTION
BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
COMMANDS FOR CALCULATION OF REINFORCEMENT ARE LOCATED IN THE
INPUT DATA FILE AFTER THE COMMAND OF ANALYSIS AND AS A RULE,
AFTER OUTPUT COMMANDS TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION.
Example:
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
699 — STAAD.Pro
.
.* OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION (ACCORDING TO
USER’S JUDGMENT)
.
* COMMAND OF LOADING AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* COMMAND TO START REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION PROCEDURE
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE RUSSIAN
.* LIST OF PARAMETERS BEING USED IN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
.
.
BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22
CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40
DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40
CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252
.
.
.
* COMMAND OF BEAM REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40
* COMMAND OF COLUMN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
DESIGN COLUMN 1 TO 22
* COMMAND OF CALCULATION 2D ELEMENTS (SLABS, WALLS, SHELLS)
DESIGN ELEMENT 41 TO 252
* COMMAND OF INTERRUPTION REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for
beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not
depend on UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken,
the values of which differ from determined in the program.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
701 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
name Value
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
703 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
name Value
l SSE=0, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
l SSE=1, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must be
carried out according to the
cracking requirements (the second
limit state)
705 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
name Value
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
707 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
Name Value
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
709 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
711 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
Name Value
l STA=0, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried out according to
the requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
l STA=2, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical reinforcement
must be carried according to the
cracking requirements (the second
limit state);
l MMA=0, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
stresses in local axis;
713 — STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
15A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of
longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis and torsional moments are
considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis
is ignored. In calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis
and torsional moments are taken into account.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from
conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement.
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times – according to
strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In
reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken
and in calculations from conditions of crack width limitation – characteristic (normative) load
values are used. Both calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple
analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of
loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered
in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter
NLT must be included into the list of considered loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the
width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement
resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in
SNiP 2.03.01−84* and to any intermediate value as well.
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement.
Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the
beam 0.3m and at the end – 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be
used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the length of
which is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and then used in
calculation of reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into account default values of
parameters SFA and ЕFA equal to zero.
When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam the length
of which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated and then used in
calculation of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to consider values of parameters
SFA=0.3 and ЕFA=0,2 in reinforcement calculation.
715 — STAAD.Pro
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated
quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.4-Beam design output 1
Result Description
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according
to conditions limiting opened crack width.
Result Description
Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm.
reinforcement - 40 mm.
reinforcement - 30 mm.
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
717 — STAAD.Pro
---------------------------------------------------------------------
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T
mm kN/m 10cm 15cm 20cm 25cm 30cm kN kNm N.
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to
calculation.
15A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility
of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM
ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should
conform with recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according
to deformed diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of
parameters ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following output is presented:
Table 15A.6-Column design output 1
Result
719 — STAAD.Pro
Result
(rectangular section)
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they
may differ from recommended on the lower side.
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following results are presented:
721 — STAAD.Pro
Nx, respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to
Mz, local axis and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
My reinforcement
Load. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
N. reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below.
(circular section)
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section Astot Percent Nx Mz My Load
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from
recommended on the lower side.
Here:
723 — STAAD.Pro
Table 15A.7-Slab design output
Result Description
Element number of finite element, TOP - “top” zone of member, BOT
- “bottom” zone of member (“top” zone of member is
determined by positive direction of local axis -see Fig.2)
Asx intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the
local axis ), sq.cm/m
Mx
distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis
, kNm/m
Nx distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis
, kNm/m
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of
reinforcing in the first direction
Asy intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to
the local axis ), sq.cm/m
My
distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis
kNm/m
Ny distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local
axis kN/m
Load N.(Y) number of loading version, determining intensity of
reinforcing in the second direction
Design of members per SNiP 2.23-81* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
15B.1 General
Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as majority of modern codes is based on the method of
limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure,
qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual
deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
l The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their
service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements,
vibrations, etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads
and actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads
and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load
reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 “Loads and Actions”.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken
in to account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment
sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels
are presented. Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other
versions of the program.
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT
0.12 DT 0.16
727 — STAAD.Pro
Table 15B.2-Compound Sections for Russian Steel Design
Section Section Type Designation
form
(SP – clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
T B1-10
Note: Flange of Tee beam is at the
top part of cross-section if T SH1-23
beta angle = 0°, or at the
T K1-20
bottom part if beta angle =
180°.
15B.2.1 Example
UNITS METER
MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN
* I-BEAM
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* CHANNEL
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLE
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125X80X10
* ROUND ASSORTMENT PIPE
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102X5.5
* ROUND PIPE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS DEFINED BY CLIENT
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
* SQUARE TUBE FROM ASSORTMENT
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120X120X3
* RECTANGULAR TUBE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSION DEFINED BY CLIENT
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* DOUBLE CHANNEL (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ММ)
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* DOUBLE UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLES WITH SHORT LEGS BACK-TO-BACK
(DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ММ)
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125X80X10 SP 0.01
* MEMBER OF TEE SECTION
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* FLANGE OF T-BEAMS AT THE BOTTOM OF CROSS-SECTION
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* ORIENTATION OF THE LOCAL ANGLE AXES IN RELATION TO THE GLOBAL
AXES OF THE STRUCTURE
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
COMMANDS OF OUTPUT DATA FOR CHECK AND SELECTION OF SECTIONS ARE
LOCATED AFTER COMMANDS OF ANALYSIS AND, AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT
COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION.
729 — STAAD.Pro
15B.3.1 Example
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* COMMAND OF LOADINGS AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* COMMAND TO START DESIGN ACCORDING TO RUSSIAN CODE
PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* LIST OF PARAMETERS USED IN CHECKING AND SELECTING
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4
LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* PARAMETER OF OUTPUT AMOUNT OF INFORMATION ON CALCULATION RESULTS
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* COMMAND TO START SECTION CHECK PROCEDURE
CHECK CODE ALL
* COMMAND TO START SECTION SELECTION PROCEDURE
SELECT ALL
.
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT CONTENT OF ASSORTMENT TABLES
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO
SECTIONS
STEEL TAKE OFF
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO MEMBERS
AND SECTIONS
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
factor (ratio Anet/Agross (NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design
cross-section area.
Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is assumed in
calculations.
Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members. Normal
stresses are calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses are verified in the
neutral axis zone of the same section. If normal stresses do not exceed design steel strength
and tangential stresses do not exceed design value of steel shear strength Rsγs then according
to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* principal stresses are checked.
General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in accordance
with clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in two planes – in accordance
with “Guide to design of steel structures” (to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient φb value is
determined according to appendix 7 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load
(concentrated or distributed), numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of
applied load are required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient φb = 1.0.
Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit (through
parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural member allowing for
load reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data. Limit values of deflection are
determined in accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 “Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10.
Deflections and displacements”. Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of
review (CHECK) problem.
731 — STAAD.Pro
15B.3.5 Eccentric compression/tension members
Eccentric compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of axial force
and bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentric application of longitudinal
force or due to transverse force.
Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of eccentric
compression/tension member taking into consideration condition Ry < 530 MPa, τ < 0.5Rs and
N/(An Ry ) > 0.1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other cases-by formula 50. Calculations of
stability verification are performed according to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34.
When reduced relative eccentricity mef> 20 eccentric compression members are calculated as
flexural members (N = 0), when mef< 20 strength by formula 49 is not verified (clause 5.24).
In this version of calculation according to requirements of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* there is common
database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore solution of section selection
problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal legs angle irrespective of set at the
beginning. The same is and with rectangular and square tubes.
Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of parameters,
which differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the input data file.
Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and the second
group of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be performed only according
to the first group of limit states with subsequent recalculation and verification of selected
section with allowance for deflection.
Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members according to
strength and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set slenderness limit for
compression and tension members respectively for their stability calculation, or refuse
consideration of slenderness by setting default parameters. In this case selection of sections
will be performed with consideration only of strength check.
Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable relative
deflection value) different from set in the program.
In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary to set their
design strength by parameters UNL and PY.
In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see Table 12B.4).
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
733 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
DMAX
1. Maximum allowable section depth
[m]
DMIN
0. Minimum allowable section depth
[m]
735 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
737 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Output parameter:
2 C245 1 “ GT, F
3 C255 1 “ GT, F
4 C275 1 “ GT, F
5 C285 1 “ GT, F
6 C345 1 “ GT, F
7 C345K 1 “ GT, F
8 C375 1 “ GT, F
9 C390 1 “ F
10 C390K 1 “ F
11 C440 1 “ F
12 C590 1 “ F
13 C590К 1 “ F
GOST 10705-
14 BSt3kp 2 Tube
80*
GOST 10705-
2 80*
15 BSt3ps Tube
3 GOST 10706-
76*
GOST 10705-
2 80*
16 BSt3sp Tube
3 GOST 10706-
76*
739 — STAAD.Pro
15B.5 Member Selection and Code Check
Both code checking and member selection options are available in SNiP 2.23-81*.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and advanced forms.
Form of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK.
Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible: suppressed –
results according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0), extended - results according to all
check conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced – complete information on results of member
design (TRACK=2).
(TRACK=2).
number of member;
result obtained (ACCEPTED – requirements are met, FAILURE – are not met);
value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its direction (“C” –
compression, “P” – tension);
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
l Material characteristics:
l Steel;
l Design resistance;
l Elasticity modulus;
l Section characteristics:
l Length of member;
l Section area;
l Net area;
l Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I);
l Section modulus (W);
l First moment of area (S);
l Radius of gyration;
l Effective length;
l Slenderness;
l Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively.
l Design forces:
l Longitudinal force;
l Moments;
l Shear force.
741 — STAAD.Pro
Signs “+” and “-“ indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear
forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by
formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause.
========================================================================
MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel =C245
Modulus of elasticity = 206.E+06 KPA
Design Strength (Ry) = 240.E+03 KPA
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m)
Member Length = 6.00E+00
Gross Area = 1.38E-02
Net Area = 1.38E-02
z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 768.E-06 173.E-07
Section modulus (W) : 256.E-05 182.E-06
First moment of area (S) : 149.E-05 156.E-06
Radius of gyration (i) : 236.E-03 354.E-04
Effective Length : 600.E-02 600.E-02
Slenderness : 0.00E+00 0.00E+00
DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998
Axial force : 0.00E+00
z-axis y-axis
Moments : -465.E+00 0.00E+00
Shear force : 0.00E+00 500.E-02
CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK
F.(39) M/(C1*Wmin)=-465.0E+00/ 1.12E+00* 2.56E-03= 162.1E+03
F.(41) Q/(H*T)= 500.0E-02/ 6.00E-01* 1.20E-02= 694.E+00
RY*GAMAC= 240.0E+03
ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 1.094E-02 M
MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 1.094E-02 M Loading No. 1
ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 3.000E-02 M
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: “+”, “-“, “/”, “*”,”**”, “SQRT”, their
respective meanings (i.e., addition, subtraction, division, multiplication, raising to the second
power (squared), and square root). Conventional notations of stresses, coefficients and
characteristics of steel resistance comply with accepted in the SNiP standard. Only Greek
letters are changed by their names (e.g., , γ -GAMAC; α-ALPHA; β-BETA, η-ETA, φ-PHI, etc.).
c
Design of members per CP65 requires the STAAD Asia Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
749 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per SABS-0100-1 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
755 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with
YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate
them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure includes
computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with
proper spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of SABS
0100 clause 4.3.5. Torsional reinforcement is separately reported.
============================================================================
B E A M N O. 4 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
M30 Fe450 (Main) Fe450 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 6000.0 mm SIZE: 715.0 mm X 380.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | MZ Load Case MX Load Case | VY P Load
Case
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
0.0 | 84.77 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
500.0 | 70.70 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
1000.0 | 56.64 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
1500.0 | 42.57 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
2000.0 | 28.50 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
2500.0 | 14.43 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
3000.0 | 0.37 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
3500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -13.70 1 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -27.77 1 |
4500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -41.84 1 |
5000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -55.90 1 |
5500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -69.97 1 |
6000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
757 — STAAD.Pro
| -84.04 1 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 680.71/ 706.86( 9-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 567.75/ 603.18( 3-16í )| 8í @ 115 mm
1000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 454.79/ 471.24( 6-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
1500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
2000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
2500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
3000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
3500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
4000.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
4500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
5000.0 | 448.91/ 452.40( 4-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
5500.0 | 561.87/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
6000.0 | 674.83/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TORSION REINFORCEMENT : Not required
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and
square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes
slightly conservative results in certain cases.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely
give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load
case.
============================================================================
C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
M30 Fe450 (Main) Fe450 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 715.0 mm X 380.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : -14.6
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 0.00 0.00
============================================================================
759 — STAAD.Pro
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard
SAB0162-1:1993
17B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at
which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most
economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for
each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of SAB0162-1:
1993. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
Refer to Section 5.37 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be
referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If
called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into
these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
17B.4.1 I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
17B.4.2 H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
17B.4.3 PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
3 TABLE ST 127X64X15C
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01 unit length in between
should be specified as:
Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing.
The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
761 — STAAD.Pro
17B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a 25mm
thickness is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the local z-axis
(see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-Y’ axis shown in the
CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to
correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse
angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting
the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6 of the
STAAD Technical Reference manual.
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5 angles with
a spacing of 0.01 length units.
17B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification
instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width),
and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of 3mm.
Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by
using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications.
For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside diameter of 48
length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms
of current length unit.
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-MAR-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5
11.4 0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
763 — STAAD.Pro
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C
9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1
10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
All the members are checked against allowable slenderness ratio as per Cl.10.2 of SAB0162-1:
1993.
17B.6.1 Axial
Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1
using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ,
and LZ are applicable for this.
4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are
applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
17B.6.3 Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the
factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If
UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the
joints of the member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In
this case, the moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater
765 — STAAD.Pro
than or equal to one-tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported
length. The equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance
of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as:
Phi*Py*Fy
Phi*Sy*Fy
Where:
2. Single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African code doesn’t
provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such
as Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a
rational method.
17B.6.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0
or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the section is
considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the
web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for safety in
shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this
limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of
these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
767 — STAAD.Pro
Param- Default Description
eter Value
Name
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1 (which is also its default value), moments are
calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no section locations are specified and
the BEAM parameter is set to zero, design will be based on member start and end forces only.
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical
condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed. Using the TRACK parameter can control the
extent of detail of the output.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
769 — STAAD.Pro
17B.8.1 Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER
CODE SAB0162
MAIN 1 ALL
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1
CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO 23
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it.
Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited
to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members listed as
PRISMATIC.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, the output will be displayed as follows:
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/
LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
==================================================================-
=====
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543
1
0.00 0.00 -191.90
4.08
|----------------------------------------------------------------
-----|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER- 1 UNIT - KN,M PHI =
0.90 |
| MRZ= 353.27 MRY= 63.99
|
| CR= 453.21 TR= 2308.50 VR= 642.00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------
-----|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the
items printed out.
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track 2.0
parameter is as follows.
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/
LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
771 — STAAD.Pro
===================================================================-
====
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543
1
0.00 0.00 -191.90
4.08
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.308E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY =
4.532E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 3.533E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02 VRZ = 6.075E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000
KL/RY = 175.514 KL/RZ = 41.522 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 =
1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
Length = 6000 mm
Comparison
Input File
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
773 — STAAD.Pro
1 1 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 1.99947E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8191
ALPHA 6E-006
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE SABS0162
LZ 6 ALL
LY 3 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST 356X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS COMPRESSION 0.989 1
1500.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 6.00E+02
IZ = 1.95E+04 SZ = 1.07E+03 PZ = 1.21E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.57E+02 PY = 2.43E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CRY = 1.516E+03 CRZ = 2.038E+03
CTORFLX = 1.516E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.918E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 1.516E+03
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.561E+01 MRZ = 1.991E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.903E+02 VRZ = 6.461E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 0.850
KL/RY = 75.220 KL/RZ = 39.730 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 6.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 3.65E+01
17B.12.1 Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.12.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
775 — STAAD.Pro
17B.12.3 Comparison
Table 17B.3-SAB 0162 -1:1993 Verification Problem 2 comparison
Criteria Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; 3 7 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 2
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 2 TABLE ST 406X67UB
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2.00E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.00E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 2
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 3 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -104 4
1 UNI GY -4
2 UNI GY -2
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
CB 0 ALL
UNL 4 MEMB 1
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 85 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
17B.12.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.308E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.532E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 3.533E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02 VRZ = 6.075E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
777 — STAAD.Pro
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000
KL/RY = 175.514 KL/RZ = 41.522 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
17B.13.1 Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by
Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.13.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.13.3 Comparison
Table 17B.4-SAB 0162-1:1993 Verification Problem 3 comparison
Criteria Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
STAAD PLANE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 8 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST 457X67UB
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
17B.13.5 Output
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
* 1 ST 457X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
FAIL SAB-13.8 4.134 1
0.00 0.00 -560.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02
IZ = 2.94E+04 SZ = 1.30E+03 PZ = 1.47E+03
IY = 1.45E+03 SY = 1.53E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
779 — STAAD.Pro
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CRY = 3.738E+02 CRZ = 1.996E+03
CTORFLX = 3.738E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.257E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.738E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 1.355E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.871E+02 VRZ = 5.730E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 194.263 KL/RZ = 43.142 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 8.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.04E+01
Design of members per NBE-MV103-1972 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
DJ2 End node of member Node no. denoting end point for
calculation of "Deflection Length".
785 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Design of members per EHE requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
0. Tied Column.
1. Spiral Column.
787 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per BSK 99 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
793 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per BBK 94 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
1. LA — Least aggressive
2. NA — Aggressive
3. MA — Very aggressive
799 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
Design of members per ASD 1994 requires the STAAD US Specialized Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
MEMB-LIST TA ST SECTION-NAME
Example
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PIPEX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RECTX.500WALL
Example
Example
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
803 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not implemented
in STAAD.Pro.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
805 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
1 - All
2 - Extrusions
3 - Drawn Tube
4 - Pipe
0 - Sidesway is present
along the local Y-axis of
the member
1 - There is no sidesway
along the local Y-axis of
the member.
807 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
0 - Sidesway is present
along the local Z-axis of
the member
1 - There is no sidesway
along the local Z-axis of
the member.
809 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
1 1100-H12
2 1100-H14
3 2014-T6
4 2014-T6510
5 2014-T6511
6 2014-T651
7 3003-H12
8 3003-H14
9 3003-H16
10 3003-H18
11 3004-H32
12 3004-H34
13 3004-H36
14 3004-H38
15 5005-H12
16 5005-H14
17 5005-H32
18 5005-H34
19 5050-H32
20 5050-H34
21 5052-H32
22 5052-H34
23 5083-H111
24 5086-H111
25 5086-H116
Value Name
26 5086-H32
27 5086-H34
28 5454-H111
29 5454-H112
30 5456-H111
31 5456-H112
32 6005-T5
33 6105-T5
34 6061-T6
35 6061-T6510
36 6061-T6511
37 6061-T651
38 6063-T5
39 6063-T6
40 6351-T5
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an
example on the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
20A.5.1 Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER
CODE ALUMINUM
811 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an
example on the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.
Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD US Std Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition manual,
namely, Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double Angles, Tubes and
Pipes. Design of HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition AISC LRFD manual) and
Composite beams (I shapes with concrete slab on top) is not supported.
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE 52
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects
like flange buckling, web crippling, etc. must be performed manually. It is assumed that you
are familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer
to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
817 — STAAD.Pro
Table 21A.1-Steel Design Parameters for ASCE 10-97
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1. EQN.3.7-4, Page 4
2. EQN.3.7-5, Page 4
3. EQN.3.7-6, Page 4
4. EQN.3.7-7, Page 5
819 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
1.0 = No sidesway
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
821 — STAAD.Pro
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per
ASCE Manuals and Reports
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the ASCE Manuals and Reports on
Engineering Practice No. 52 – Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition
Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD US Std Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of calculation of the
relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to
resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economical
section is selected based on the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program
also checks the slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements, and
the width-thickness requirements.
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects
like flange buckling, web crippling, etc. must be performed manually. It is assumed that you
are familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer
to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
823 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Member
LT Effective length for warping.
Length
825 — STAAD.Pro
21B.4 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub. 52
implementation. In general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION
and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
These operations may be repeated any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
2. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file (file extension .PUN)
and give preliminary design results.
4. Re-run the analysis to read the modified Geometry file for the final design results.
22A.1.1 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It
can be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. For the initial run of an API
code check, all joints will be assumed to be a T/Y joint. See "Joint Design" for details.
Ft = 0.60·Fy
Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to Clause 3.2.4-2 of the
API code:
Fv = 0.4·Fy
fv = V / 0.5 A
Fvt = 0.4·Fy
F is the maximum torsional shear stress per Clause 3.2.4-3 of the API code.
vt
829 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
Where:
E
Cc = 2π 2
Fy
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic
xe
buckling coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
Fb = 0.75Fy
Definitions
β = d/D
γ = D/(2T)
τ = t/T
Joint Validity
The validity range of the joints that are identified will be checked as per Cl. 4.3.1 of the code.
The conditions to be checked for each joint are as given below:
0.2 ≤ β ≤ 1.0
10 ≤ γ ≤ 50
30° ≤ θ ≤ 90°
831 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
If any of these conditions are not satisfied for the joint under consideration, the programissues
a warning message corresponding to the invalid parameter(s). The program will, however,
perform the joint checks as the code allows for the design of such joints with modified values
of yield strength. You can use the FYLD parameter to reset the yield strength.
Joint Capacity
The capacity of the joint, both the axial capacity and the moment capacity is
Where:
F = the yield stress of the chord member at the joint (or 0.8 of the tensile stress,
y
if less)
Q and Q are the strength factor and the Chord factor that are to be
u f
determined based on the joint type. The strength factor, Q , is to be determined
u
as given in Section 4.3.3 of the code (ref. Table. 4.3-1 of the API code).
FSJPc FSJM c 2
Q f = 1 + C1 − C 2 M y − C3A
Py
2 2
FSJPc FSJM c
A= +
Py M y
P = axial load
c
M c = M ipb
2
+ M opb
2
Joint Type C C C
1 2 3
K joints under brace axial loading 0.2 0.2 0.3
Joint Type C C C
1 2 3
All joints under brace moment
0.2 0 0.4
loading
Note: For values of β between 0.9 and 1.0, coefficients are linearly interpolated between
listed values.
For joints that are a mixture of K, X, or Y joints, the capacity of the joint is evaluated as a
weighted average of the capacities of each joint.
In case the joint is subjected to combined axial load and bending moments (in-plane and/or
out-of-plane), the program performs the following interaction check as given by Cl 4.3.6 of
the code:
2
+ +
P M M
≤ 1.0
Pa a ipb
M Ma
opb
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, wile in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
833 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
1.0 = calculate
moments at twelfth
points along the
beam, and use the
maximum Mz
location for design.
2.0 = Secondary
member
0.0 = Sidesway in
local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
2.0 =
3.0 =
835 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
2. 0 = Welding is
both sides. For
closed sections like
pipe or tube, the
welding will be only
on one side.
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have
passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like any of the API
specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the ratio of the critical
condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the
member) where the critical condition occurs.
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2 of the Technical
Reference manual.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
l Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.
l Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table
will be limited to sections in the user table.
l Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input
as prismatic.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord member can be
f
selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based on geometry and
independent of loading) or specified in the External file.
In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance) are used
to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two members based on the
larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints the first
member modeled will be selected as the chord.
You should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is
representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question.
22A.6.1 Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints – Chord
Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
837 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
Member
the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
AISC steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there
will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the AISC code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are
the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where
design forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and
will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension
(FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress
(FV).
839 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CRITICAL : 2 0.245 PASS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
The program only checks simple joints and overlapping joints formed between circular hollow
section members. Any other type of joint within the structure or joint cans will not be
considered for API joint checks. Other types of joints (such as grouted joints, joints with ring
stiffeners, etc.) are not considered.
Material Strength
The API code states in Cl. 4.2.1 that the value of yield stress of the chord member to be used in
the calculation of the joint capacity should be limited to 0.8 times the tensile strength of the
chord for materials with a yield stress less than or equal to 500 MPa.
The yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks value is specified in the joint data file
(filename.PUN). For every joint, the value specified in the FYLD column will be used as the
yield strength to be used for the joint capacity checks. When the file is created for the first
time by the program, a default value of 36 ksi is used for all joints. The value used for each
joint check will also be reported in the output file.
Note: All the fields in the joint data file (*.PUN file) are to be in imperial units.
Clause 4.2.3 of the code specifies a minimum capacity for any joint as follows:
The connections at the ends of a member should develop the strength required by the design
loads, but should not be less than 50% of the effective strength of the member. The effective
strength is defined as the buckling load for a compression member or the yield load for
members in tension. You, however, must ensure that this condition is satisfied even if the
joint strength indicates a PASS status.
The program checks to see if the capacity of a joint as calculated by the methods in the code
satisfies this requirement. If not the program issues a warning to that effect and marks the
joint as FAILED. The program calculates the axial and/or bending moment capacities of the
joint and reports the load/capacity ratio for each condition. The program also reports a ‘critical
ratio’ along with the condition that induces this ratio. Note that the maximum among the
various individual ratios will be reported as the ‘critical ratio’. The program also reports a
PASS/FAIL status for the joint.
See "Simple Joints: Capacity Checks" for details of capacity checks performed.
Joint Classification
Clause of 4.2.4 of the API code essentially classifies a joint into one of the three basic types: K,
X, and Y. Joint classification is the process whereby the axial load in a given brace is
subdivided into its K, X, and Y components corresponding to the three joint types. A joint—
as considered in the code—is the connection between a "chord" and a "brace" that are in the
same plane. The program considers any two members to be in the same plane if they lie in
planes that are within ±15 degrees of each other. The classification of a joint can also be a
mixture of any of the basic types mentioned above. Once the classification of a joint has been
identified, the capacity of that joint is then evaluated per Section 4.3 of the code.
The program automatically identifies the joints in a structure and identifies the chord and
the brace members. The program applies the ±15° rule to determine the members in a plane
and then determines the joint as being the intersection point of these members. Since a joint
is between a chord and a brace member, the program considers two members at a time and
then proceeds to identify the chord and the brace member at that joint. The program
assumes the member with the larger diameter among the two members as the chord member
and the other is considered as the brace. If both members have the same diameter, the chord
is assumed to be the member with the thicker wall. If both the diameter and thickness of the
members are identical, the program will assume the most horizontal member to be the
chord. To be automatically considered as a chord member, the member has to be continuous
across the joint. The user can always edit the joint data file (*.PUN) to add or delete new
BRACE-CHORD joints.
The chord and brace member numbers (from the STAAD input file) are saved under the
CHORD and BRACE columns in the filename.PUN file.
When the joint data file (.PUN) is created by the program, a default joint Class Y is assumed
for the initial joint checks. This is indicated by the K, X, and Y column values being set to 0,
0, and 1 respectively. Since the API code allows for a mixed joint classification, you must
manually vary the contribution factors for K, X, and Y joint classes for a given joint. For
example, if a joint is to be 25% K, 25% X, and 50% Y, then you must assign K column value of
0.25, X column value of 0.25, and a Y column value of 0.50 for that joint. The program will
verify that the supplied contributions sum to 1.0.
If the joint has a gap (i.e., a K-GAP joint), the gap distance (in inches) must be supplied in
the GAP column. The value to be provided will be the actual gap between the brace members
at the joint. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. The
overlapping brace in this case can then be indicated by specifying the member number at the
OBRACE (Overlapping brace) column in the data file.
Overlapping Joints
Clause 4.4 of the API discusses overlapping joints. Checks for overlapping joints will be
performed as described Section 22A.2.6. The difference will be in that the gap value, g, will be
taken as negative in evaluating the various factors.
841 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
If the axial loads in the overlapping brace and the through brace have the same sign, the axial
load in the through brace will be increased to allow for the loads in the overlapping brace.
This will be achieved by allowing a portion of the overlapping brace load equal to the
proportion of the overlapping brace area to be added to the axial load in the through brace.
Note: The program issues a warning for any joint overlap is less than 0.25·β·D.
When the API design module is invoked, the program will initially check for the presence of a
filename.PUN file (where filename is the name of the .std file) in the same folder as the
input file. If the program does not find such a file, it assumes that the joint design is being
run for the first time and will create this file. If the program does find this file, it will assume
that the joint design has been run at least once and will attempt to read the input data from
this file. Not that modifying and saving the main structure (i.e., any changes to the main
model using GUI or text editor) will invalidate all design results and the program will
automatically delete all design related files including the *.PUN file. Hence if the user wises to
keep an existing version of the *.PUN file, he/she must make a separate copy of this file before
making any changes to the model.
General Format
b# c# K% X% Y% Dc Tc db tb gap fy ob tw swap
Where:
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type,
respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1).
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value
of GAP is assumed as 0. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a
negative value.
tw = Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the weld throat thickness or
thickness t of the thinner brace in inches
Example
*BRACE CHORD K X Y D T D
T GAP FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP
10 7 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394
16.000 0.394 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
13 7 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394
7.626 0.315 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
14 11 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394
7.626 0.315 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
843 — STAAD.Pro
Section 23
ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes
Design of members per ANSI/AISC N690-1994 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
All the design steps are done as described in section 2.3 Allowable per AISC-ASD (Ninth
Edition) Code of Technical Reference manual except for allowable stress in compression for
AUSTENlTlC STAINLESS STEEL. Section Q1.5.9 is used to calculate allowable compressive stress
for Austenitic Stainless Steel. Correction made in Supplementary s1 published in April 15, 2002
has been applied.
Note: By default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care should be
taken to assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the members for the
analysis. There is a parameter – STYPE – to change material type to either Stainless
Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel (STYPE=0).
and Q1.6-1b:
SFC ⋅ fa SMY ⋅ fby SMZ ⋅ fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.6F y Fby Fbz
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and [0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
equation Q1.6-3:
SFT ⋅ fa SMY ⋅fby SMZ ⋅ fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.6F y Fby Fbz
Where:
SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23A.1 for details.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure
847 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
0. No composite action
1. Composite action
2. Ignore positive moments during
design
0. False
1. True
849 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
0. Without shoring
1. With shoring
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
0. Normal Steel
1. Austenitic Stainless Steel
851 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
300 for
“Truss”
member
0. Minimum detail
1. Intermediate detail level
2. Maximum detail
0. Closed sections.
1. Open sections.
23A.2.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23A.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23A.3.1 Example 1
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std
Solution
(Kl/r)max > Cc
Comparison
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
853 — STAAD.Pro
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
855 — STAAD.Pro
| 2.14 C 0.00 -7.38 6.56 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.2 Example 2
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case2.std
Solution
Comparison
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
4 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
857 — STAAD.Pro
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 6.56 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 3.7 (KIP-FEET) |
|PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES |
|IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 85.65 | FA = 9.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 31.56 + L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 78.74 | L1 FCZ = 21.60 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.04 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 18.60 |
| dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 137.05 |
| (KL/R)max = 85.65 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 |
| fv = 0.90 |
| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 3.7 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.3 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.346 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -3.69 3.28 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.3 Example 3
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case3.std
Solution
Comparison
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
859 — STAAD.Pro
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
861 — STAAD.Pro
23B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code
23B.1 General Comments
For code checking of steel members, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable
stresses as defined by the "ANSI/AISC N690-1984: Nuclear Facilities - Steel Safety-Related
Structures for Design, Fabrication, and Erection."
23B.2.1 Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (K·L/r_min), as per clause Q1.8.4 of
the code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_
min) shall not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for bracing members and other
secondary members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters respectively.
23B.2.3 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60·Fy , but not more than 0.5·Fu
on the Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF parameter can
be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
Ae = Ct·An
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
23B.2.4 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section Q1.9,
except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by Q1.5.1.3. The
allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be in
accordance to section Q1.5.9.
Where:
Fa = 12·π2 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
Fa = 12 - (KL/r)/20
be = 253·t/√Fy {1 - (50.3/[(b/t)√Fy ]} ≤ b
be = 253·t/√Fy {1 - (44.3/[(b/t)√Fy ]} ≤ b
863 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
Fb = 0.66·Fy
Fb = 0.60·Fy
Fb = 0.75·Fy
Fb = Fy [0.79 – 0.002(bf/2tf)√Fy ]
and Q1.6-1b
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and [0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
equation Q 1.6-1b:
Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 17B.1 for details.
Where:
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
865 — STAAD.Pro
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure
Table 23B.1-Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1984
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for calculation
member of "Deflection Length"
867 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest section for the
profile(s) specified for member selection. See
Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference
Manual for details.
300 for
“Truss”
member
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
23B.4.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
23B.6 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads (3 kip/ft)
in both the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe section made from
Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
Ax = 4.30 in.2
869 — STAAD.Pro
Iy = Iz = 15.20 in.4
ft = P/Ae
Where:
(Kl/r)max < Cc
2 2
(63.83)
1.0 −
( Kl / r)
1.0 −
2 2
= 36ksi = 17.06ksi
2(127.68)
Fc = Fy
2C c
3 3
5 3( Kl / r) ( Kl / r) 5 3(63.83) (63.83)
+ − + −
3
3 8C c 8C c3 3 8(127.68) 8(127.68)
fa/(0.6·Fy ) + fby /Fby + fbz/Fbz = 3.10 ksi/[0.6(36 ksi)] + 0.363 + 0.346 = 0.853
Comparison
0.144
Tension 0.108
(0.107, CT = 1.0)
0.853
Tension + Bending 0.815 2.51%
(0.817, CT = 1.0)
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
871 — STAAD.Pro
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT INCHES KIP
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST PIPS50
UNIT FEET KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX
LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
873 — STAAD.Pro
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER 3
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4
PARAMETER 4
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST ALL
PARAMETER 5
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST PIPS50 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.844 4
10.00 C 44.84 47.02 120.00
875 — STAAD.Pro
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.38E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 4.30 AYY: 2.27 AZZ: 2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88
|
| SZZ: 5.46 SYY: 5.46
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 63.83 KL/R-Y: 63.83 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.108 1 1.00E+01 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.136 2 1.00E+01 - - - -
|
| COMP&BEND 0.844 4 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01 4.48E+01
|
| TEN&BEND 0.815 3 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01 4.48E+01
|
| SHEAR-Y 0.063 3 - 1.96E+00 - - -
|
| SHEAR-Z 0.060 3 - - 1.87E+00 - -
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is a W6x12
section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 3.55 in.2
d = 6.03 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
Sz = 7.31 in.3
Comparison
877 — STAAD.Pro
Input File
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
*UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 3 ALL
UNT 3 ALL
UNIT KIP INCH
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W6X12 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.387 1
0.00 T 0.00 -67.40 72.00
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 156.64 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 300.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 6.09E+00 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 3.55 AYY: 1.39 AZZ: 1.49 RZZ: 2.50 RYY: 0.92
|
879 — STAAD.Pro
| SZZ: 7.33 SYY: 1.50
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 57.71 KL/R-Y:156.64 UNL: 36.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60
|
| CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMP&BEND 0.387 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y 0.094 1 - 1.87E+00 - - -
|
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - -
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
Note: From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974
and NF-3000 1977 version of codes.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design
Codes SELECT Code Pack.
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of
the checks.
24A.1.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members
shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not
exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary
members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24A.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000
n
1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24A.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF-
3000 1974.
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
( KL / r)
2
1 −
2C c
2
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C c 8C c3
Where:
2
2π E
Cc =
Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies
all the sub-sections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974.
253t 50.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
253t 44.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
( KL / r)
2
Q sQ a1 −
2C ′ c
2
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C ′c 3
8C ′ c
Where:
2
2π E
C ′c =
Q sQ aF
y
885 — STAAD.Pro
24A.1.4 Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in
XVII-2214 of NF-3000 1974 is:
a. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled
or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes
and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending
stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-2214.1(a) and
(b) of NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
Where:
45, 000k
Cv = 2
F y (h / t )
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
887 — STAAD.Pro
following table.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
889 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
A. Normal Conditions
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS, KV, or KBK
parameters are not set, a
warning is issued that these
must be user-defined.
0. Minimum detail
1. Intermediate detail level
2. Maximum detail
891 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
24A.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5
kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in
accordance with ASME NF3000 1974.
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST W24X104
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
893 — STAAD.Pro
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 9.28 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.07E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01
|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.82E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.16E-01
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 30.60 AYY: 12.03 AZZ: 12.75 RZZ: 10.07 RYY: 2.91
|
| SZZ: 257.69 SYY: 40.63
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 2.68 KL/R-Y: 9.28 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.85
|
|
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.008 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMP&BEND 0.032 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y 0.029 1 - 5.00E+00 - - -
|
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - -
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of
the checks.
24B.2 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24B.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2)
and (3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
( KL / r)
2
1 −
2C c
2
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C c 8C c3
Where:
2
2π E
Cc =
Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies
all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).
897 — STAAD.Pro
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed
s
values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced.
e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
253t 50.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
253t 44.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
( KL / r)
2
Q sQ a1 −
2C ′ c
2
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C ′c 3
8C ′ c
Where:
2
2π E
C ′c =
Q sQ aF
y
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled
or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes
and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending
stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
F = 0.75*F
b y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)
(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than 95/√F , maximum tensile and
f f y y
compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
899 — STAAD.Pro
Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4Fy
Where:
45, 000k
Cv = 2
F y (h / t )
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
901 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
A. Normal Conditions
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS, KV, or
KBK parameters are not set, a
warning is issued that these
must be user-defined.
903 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
STAAD SPACE
905 — STAAD.Pro
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is as follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-89) v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS SHEAR Y 0.770 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 75.08 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.13E+01 FCZ: 2.08E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.16E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01
|
| SHEAR: 5.18E+00
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60
|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 11.84 KL/R-Y: 75.08 UNL: 360.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90
|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 1.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
907 — STAAD.Pro
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
24C.1 Design Process
The design process follows the following design checks.
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of
the checks.
24C.2 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24C.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than
y
(0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2)
and (3).
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24C.4 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable
compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material,
including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
( KL / r)
2
1 −
2C c
2
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C c 8C c3
Where:
2
2π E
Cc =
Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies
all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).
909 — STAAD.Pro
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed
s
values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
Where:
4.05
kc =
(h / t ) 0.46 when h/t > 70, otherwise, kc = 1.0.
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced.
e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
253t 50.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
253t 44.3
be = 1 − b / t f ≤ b
f
( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual
a
area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
( KL / r)
2
Q sQ a1 −
2
2C ′ c
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C ′c 3
8C ′ c
Where:
2
2π E
C ′c =
Q sQ aF
y
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot
rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor
axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum
bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
F = 0.75*F
b y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)
(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than 95/√F , maximum tensile and
f f y y
compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
911 — STAAD.Pro
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
Where:
45, 000k
Cv = 2
F y (h / t )
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
913 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
915 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Value Description
Name
A. Normal Conditions
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS,
KV, or KBK parameters
are not set, a warning
is issued that these
must be user-defined.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
Notes
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Member Selection command.
917 — STAAD.Pro
24C. 18C.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a
uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with
B571806 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1998.
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1998
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
919 — STAAD.Pro
| CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 - 1.00E+02 - - -
|
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - -
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
Note: Use of 2004 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) NRC (build
20.07.07.30) or higher. Use of 2001 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3)
NRC (build 20.07.08.22) or higher.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 2001 & 2004 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design
Codes SELECT Code Pack.
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of
the checks.
24D.1.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200,
and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main
members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit
for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24D.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60·F ), but not more than (0.5·F )
y u
on the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c),
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted
e
by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be
computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A e = Ct · A n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in
STAAD.
24D.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable
compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material,
including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
(Eq. A1)
Where:
Fa = 12·π2 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
(Eq. A2)
Fa = Fy [0.47 - (Kl/r)/444]
Fa = Fy [0.40 - (Kl/r)/600]
Fa = 0.60·Fy
Fa = 0.75·Fy
923 — STAAD.Pro
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element
satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d)..
A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given
s s
in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When 95/(Fy /kc)1/2 < b/t < 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 1.293 - 0.00309·(b/t)·(Fy /kc)1/2
Where:
be = 253·t/√(f){1 - 50.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
be = 253·t/√(f){1 - 44.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
Where:
Fb = 0.66·Fy
Fb = 0.75·Fy
Fb = 0.75·Fy
Fb = Fy [1.075 – 0.005(bf/2tf)√Fy ]
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
925 — STAAD.Pro
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-
sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
Where:
45, 000k
Cv = 2
F y (h / t )
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and
the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General
and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis,
some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to
1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be
changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a
member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM
parameter), design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed
based on forces calculated at 13 sections, including ends.
927 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for calculation
of the of "Deflection Length"
member
A. Normal Conditions
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS, KV, or KBK
parameters are not set, a warning is
issued that these must be user-
defined.
929 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Description
Name Value
0. Minimum detail
1. Intermediate detail level
2. Maximum detail
Notes
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code
Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the
specification of the Code Checking command.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification
of the Member Selection command.
STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08
931 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-04) v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS NF-3322.1(b) 0.635 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 20.85 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.20E+01 FCZ: 2.22E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.22E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01
|
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60
|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 3.29 KL/R-Y: 20.85 UNL: 100.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00
|
| CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90
|
| CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0
|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - -
|
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00
|
933 — STAAD.Pro
Service Level Conditions are basically the loading conditions for which the plant structure and
its components are to be designed. The same primary load can be multiplied by different
factors to signify the different service levels. Also the load combinations for various service
levels are different and pre-defined by the code.
Condition Description
A. Normal
Working
These Service Levels are the attribute of the whole structure or the structural system. So, the
existence of different Service Levels to the different parts of the structure at the same point of
time is totally ruled out.
The Service Level Factors are basically few multiplying factor by which the Allowable Stress
values are to be multiplied based on the Service Level. The different actions (e.g. Tension,
Compression, Bending, Shear etc.) have different Service Level Factors.
However, this is to be noted, the stipulated multiplying factors for creating load combinations
for Service Level B, C, and D are to be user defined in this case. The facility of creating Auto
Load Combination for different Service Levels is out of the scope of this implementation. The
user has to take care of this.
The values used for the stress level factors in STAAD.Pro are as follows:
D* KS KV KBK
* It is evident from the Table NF-3523(b)-1, that there are no predefined Stress Limit Factors
for Service Level D. So, for Service Level D, the Factors Ks, Kv and Kbk are to be user defined.
Refer to Appendix F in the code for guidance on values to specify in the design parameters.
where
Ks
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Tensile and Bending
Stresses.
Kv
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Shear Stresses
Kbk
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Compressive Axial and
Bending stresses to determine the Buckling Limit.
The program uses the service level factors—either those specified for levels A through C or the
user defined values in level D—as follows:
935 — STAAD.Pro
Section 24 Technical Support
Section 24
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
British
A Codes 49
PDelta 14
C
ANSI/AISC N690 Codes 844
CAN/CSA-086-01See Wood Design,
AS 1170 21 CAN/CSA-086-01
AS 3600 - 2001See Concrete Design, Canadian Codes 119
AS 3600
Canadian Wood Design
AS 4100 - 1998See Steel Design, AS Manual 183
4100
Cold Formed Steel
ASCE 10-97See Steel Design, ASCE
10-97 IS801 512
Cyprus 193
National AnnexSee National
D
Annex, French
DD ENV 219
Steel Design 394
DD ENV 1993 219, 222
EC5 356
J
EN 1993 235
Japanese
Equivalent slenderness 73
Codes 548
Concrete DesignSee Concrete
Design, AIJ 1991
939 — STAAD.Pro
Steel DesignSee Steel Design,
AIJ 2005 P
PN EN 1993-1-1 282
M
Polish
Modulus of Elasticity 26
National AnnexSee National
MS NE 1993-1-1 282 Annex, Polish
N S
DS412 201
Timber Design
EC5 356
UK
National AnnexSee National
Annex, British
941 — STAAD.Pro
Bentley Systems, Incorporated
+1 (800) 236-8539
www.bentley.com